hxdbzxy // Shutterstock

Extreme heat is making schools hotter — and learning harder

Different colored water bottles sit on yellow desks in a classroom.

Angela Girol has been teaching fourth grade in Pittsburgh for over two decades. Over the years she’s noticed a change at her school: It’s getting hotter. 

Some days temperatures reach 90 degrees Fahrenheit in her classroom which, like many on the East Coast, isn’t air-conditioned. When it’s hot, she said, kids don’t eat, or drink enough water. “They end up in the nurse’s office because they’re dizzy, they have a headache, their stomach hurts — all because of heat and dehydration,” she said. 

To cope with the heat, her students are now allowed to keep water on their desks, but that presents its own challenges. “They’re constantly filling up water bottles, so I have to give them breaks during the day for that. And then everyone has to go to the bathroom all the time,” she said. “I’m losing instruction time.” 

The effect extreme heat is having on schools and child care is starting to get the attention of policymakers and researchers, reports The 19th. The Center for American Progress, a left-leaning think tank, published a report on the issue in July. In April, so did the Federation of American Scientists, a nonprofit policy organization.

“The average school building in the U.S. was built nearly 50 years ago,” said policy analyst Allie Schneider, co-author of the Center for American Progress report. “Schools and child care centers were built in areas that maybe 30 or 15 years ago didn’t require access to air-conditioning, or at least for a good portion of the year. Now we’re seeing that becoming a more pressing concern.” Students are also on campus during the hottest parts of the day. “It’s something that is really important not just to their physical health, but their learning outcomes,” she said.  

Last April, the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency released its own report detailing some of the effects heat has on kids. It notes that children have a harder time thermoregulating and take longer to produce sweat, making them more vulnerable than adults to heat exhaustion and heat illness. 

Kids don’t necessarily listen to their body’s cues about heat, and might need an adult to remind them to drink water or not play outside. Kevin Toolan, a sixth-grade teacher in Long Island, New York, said having to constantly monitor heat safety distracts him from being able to teach. “The mindset is shifting to safety rather than instruction,” he said. “Those children don’t know how to handle it.”

To keep the classroom cool, he’ll turn the lights off, but kids fall asleep. “They are lethargic,” he said. 

To protect kids, schools have canceled classes because temperatures have gotten too high. Warmer temperatures also lead to more kids being absent from school, especially low-income students. And heat makes it harder to learn. One study from 2020 tracked the scores of students from schools without air-conditioning who took the PSAT exam at least twice. It found that increases in the average outdoor temperature corresponded with students making smaller gains on their retakes.

Both Toolan and Girol said that cooling options like keeping doors and windows open to promote cross ventilation are gone, thanks to the clampdowns in school security after 9/11 — and worsened by the threat of school shootings. Students and teachers are trapped in their overheating classrooms. “Teachers report leaving with migraines or signs of heat exhaustion,” said Toolan. “At 100 degrees, it is very uncomfortable. Your clothes are stuck to you.” 

The Center for American Progress report joins a call by other advocacy groups to create federal guidance that schools and child care centers could adopt “to ensure that children are not forced to learn, play and exercise in dangerously hot conditions,” Schneider said. Some states already have standards in place, but they vary. In California, child care facilities are required to keep temperatures between 68 F and 85 F. In Maryland, the recommendation is between 74 F and 82 F. A few states, like Florida, require schools to reduce outdoor activity on high-heat days. Schneider says federal guidance would help all school districts use the latest scientific evidence to set protective standards. 

In June, 23 health and education advocacy organizations signed a letter making a similar request of the Department of Education, asking for better guidance and coordination to protect kids. Some of their recommendations included publishing a plan that schools could adopt for dealing with high temperatures; encouraging states to direct more resources to providing air-conditioning in schools; and providing school districts with information on heat hazards.

“We know that school infrastructure is being overwhelmed by extreme heat, and that without a better system to advise schools on the types of practices they should be implementing, it’s going to be a little bit of the Wild West of actions being taken,” said Grace Wickerson, health equity policy manager at the Federation of American Scientists. 

A longer-term solution is upgrading school infrastructure but the need for air conditioning is overwhelming. According to the Center for American Progress report, 36,000 schools nationwide don’t have adequate HVAC systems. By 2025, it estimates that installing or upgrading HVAC or other cooling systems will cost around $4.4 billion. 

Some state or local governments are trying to address the heat issue. In June, the New York State Legislature passed a bill now awaiting the governor’s signature that would require school staff to take measures like closing blinds or turning off lights when temperatures reach 82 F inside a classroom. At 88 F, classes would be canceled. A bill introduced last year and currently before California’s state assembly would require schools to create extreme heat action plans that could include mandating hydration and rest breaks or moving recess to cooler parts of the day. 

Some teachers have been galvanized to take action, too. As president of the Patchogue-Medford Congress of Teachers, Toolan was part of an effort to secure $80 million for infrastructure upgrades through a bond vote. Over half will go to HVAC systems for some 500 classrooms in his district.

And Girol is running for a state representative seat in Pennsylvania, where a main plank in her platform is to fully fund public schools in order to pay for things like air-conditioning. She was recently endorsed by the Climate Cabinet, a federal political action committee. “Part of the reason climate is so important to me is because of this issue,” she said. “I see how it’s negatively affecting my students.”

The post Extreme heat is making schools hotter — and learning harder appeared first on KVIA.

Illustration by Camilla Forte for The Hechinger Report // images via Getty Images; Lucas Sankey // Unsplash

How could Project 2025 change education?

Photo illustration with red tones and American flag overlaid on silhouetted classroom; concept of changing education.

The proposals in the 2025 Presidential Transition Project — known as Project 2025 and designed for Donald Trump — would reshape the American education system, early education through college, from start to finish. 

The conservative Heritage Foundation is the primary force behind the sprawling blueprint, which is separate from the much less detailed Republican National Committee 2024 platform, though they share some common themes.

Kevin Roberts, the president of Heritage and its lobbying arm, Heritage Action, said in an interview with USA TODAY that Project 2025 should be seen “like a menu from the Cheesecake Factory.” No one president could take on all these changes, he said. “It’s a manual for conservative policy thought.”

The fast-changing political landscape makes it difficult to say which of these proposals might be taken up by Trump if he wins reelection. He has claimed to know nothing about it, though many of his allies were involved in drafting it. The exit of President Joe Biden from the presidential race may have an impact on Project 2025 that is still unknown. Finally, many of the broadest proposals in the document, such as changes to Title I and the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, would require congressional action, not just an order from the White House.

However, it remains a useful document for outlining the priorities of those who would likely play a part in a new Trump administration. The Hechinger Report created this reference guide that digs into the Project 2025 wishlist for education.

Early childhood

Child care for military families

Project 2025 calls for expanding child care for military families, who have access to programs that are often upheld as premier examples of high-quality care in America. – Jackie Mader

Head Start and child care 

Project 2025 calls for eliminating the Office of Head Start, which would lead to the closure of Head Start child care programs that serve about 833,000 low-income children each year. Most Head Start children are served in center-based programs, which have an outsized role in rural areas and prioritize enrolling a certain percentage of young children with disabilities who often struggle to find child care elsewhere. Head Start also provides a critical funding and resource stream to other private child care programs that meet Head Start standards, including home-based programs. – J. M.

Home-based child care

A conservative administration should also prioritize funding for home-based child care rather than “universal day care” in programs outside the home, Project 2025 says. That funding would include money for parents to stay home with a child or to pay for “familial, in-home” care, proposals that could be appealing to some early childhood advocates who have long called for more resources for informal care and stay-at-home parents. – J. M.

On-site child care

If out-of-home child care is necessary, Congress should offer incentives for on-site child care, Project 2025 says, because it “puts the least stress on the parent-child bond.” Early childhood advocates have been wary of such proposals because they tie child care access to a specific job. It also calls on Congress to clarify within the Fair Labor Standards Act that an employer’s expenses for providing such care are not part of the employee’s pay. – J. M.

K-12 education

Data collection  

The National Assessment of Educational Progress, known as the “Nation’s Report Card,” should release student performance data based on “family structure” — in addition to existing categories such as race and socioeconomic status — Project 2025 argues. Family structure, the document says, is “one of the most important — if not the most important — factor influencing student educational achievement and attainment.” The document goes on to endorse “natural family structure” of a heterosexual, two-parent household, “because all children have a right to be raised by the men and women who conceived them.” — Sarah Butrymowicz 

LGBTQ students 

Project 2025 advocates a rollback of regulations that protect people from discrimination on the basis of sexual orientation and gender identity. It calls for agencies to “focus their enforcement of sex discrimination laws on the biological binary meaning of ‘sex.'” 

The plan also calls on Congress and state lawmakers to require schools to refer to students by the names on their birth certificates and the pronouns associated with their biological sex, unless they have written permission from parents to refer to them otherwise.

The plan also equates transgender issues with child abuse and pornography, and proposes that school libraries with books deemed offensive be punished. — Ariel Gilreath

Privatization 

In place of a federal Education Department, the blueprint calls for widespread public education funding that goes directly to families, as part of its overarching goal of “advancing education freedom.”

The document specifically highlights the education savings account program in Arizona, the first state to open school vouchers up to all families. Programs like Arizona’s have few, if any, restrictions on who can access the funding. Project 2025 also calls for education savings accounts for schools under federal jurisdiction, such as those run by the Department of Defense or the Bureau of Indian Education. 

In addition, Project 2025 calls on Congress to look into creating a federal scholarship tax credit to “incentivize donors to contribute” to nonprofit groups that grant scholarships for private school tuition or education materials. — Ariel Gilreath and Neal Morton

School meals 

The federal school meals program should be scaled back to ensure that only children from low-income families are receiving the benefit, the document says. Policy changes under the Obama administration have made it easier for entire schools or districts to provide free meals to students without families needing to submit individual eligibility paperwork. — Christina A. Samuels

Special education 

Project 2025 says that the Individuals with Disabilities Education Act, which provides $14.2 billion in federal money for the education of school-aged children with disabilities, should be mostly converted to “no-strings” block grants to individual states. Lawmakers should also consider making a portion of the federal money payable directly to parents of children with disabilities, it says, so they can use it for tutoring, therapies or other educational materials. This would be similar to education savings accounts in place in Arizona and Florida. 

The blueprint also calls for rescinding a policy called “Equity in IDEA.” Under that policy, districts are required to evaluate if schools are disproportionately enrolling Black, Native American and other ethnic minority students in special education. Districts must also track how these students are disciplined, and if they are more likely than other students in special education to be placed in classrooms separate from their general education peers. Current rules, which Project 2025 would eliminate, require that districts that have significant disparities in this area must use 15 percent of their federal funding to address those problems. — C.A.S.

Teaching about race 

Project 2025 elevates concerns among members of the political right that educating students about race and racism risks promoting bias against white people. The document discusses the legal concept of critical race theory, and argues that when it is used in teacher training and school activities such as “mandatory affinity groups,” it disrupts “the values that hold communities together such as equality under the law and colorblindness.” 

The document calls for legislation requiring schools to adopt proposals “that say no individual should receive punishment or benefits based on the color of their skin,” among other recommendations. It also calls for a federal Parents’ Bill of Rights that would give families a “fair hearing in court” if they believed the federal government had enforced policies undermining their right to raise their children. — Caroline Preston

Title I

This program, funded at a little over $18 billion for fiscal 2024, is the largest federal program for K-12 schools and is designed to help children from low-income families. The conservative blueprint would encourage lawmakers to make the program a block grant to states, with few restrictions on how it can be used — and, over 10 years, to phase it out entirely. Additionally, it says, lawmakers should allow parents in Title I schools to use part of that funding for educational savings accounts that could be spent on private tutoring or other services. — C.A.S.

Higher education

Affirmative action and diversity, equity and inclusion 

The document calls for prosecuting “all state and local governments, institutions of higher education, corporations, and any other private employers” that maintain affirmative action or DEI policies. That position matches the views expressed by Donald Trump and his running mate, Sen. JD Vance of Ohio, about the use of race in college admissions and beyond. — Liz Willen 

Data collection 

In higher education, the proposal argues that college graduation and earnings data need a “risk adjustment” that factors in the types of students served by a particular institution. While selective colleges tend to post the highest graduation rates and student earnings, they also tend to enroll the least-“risky” students. A risk adjustment methodology could benefit community colleges, which often have low graduation rates but enroll many nontraditional students who face obstacles to earning a degree. It would also likely benefit for-profit colleges, which similarly tend to accept most applicants. Historically, for-profit schools have received scrutiny under Democratic administrations for poor outcomes and for allegedly misleading students about the value of the education they provide. Republican administrations typically have supported less regulation of for-profit institutions. — S.B. 

Parent PLUS loans and Pell grants 

The blueprint calls for the elimination of the Parent PLUS loan program, arguing that it is redundant “because there are many privately provided alternatives available.” Originally created for relatively affluent families, the PLUS loan program has become a crucial way for lower- and middle-income families to pay for college. In recent years, it has sparked criticism due to rising default rates and fewer protections than are afforded to other student loan borrowers.  

At present, interest rates for private loans are significantly lower than Parent PLUS rates, but they come with fewer protections, and it is more difficult to get approved for a private-bank loan. Project 2025 would also get rid of PLUS loans for graduate students.

If the federal PLUS programs were eliminated, it could stem one portion of the rising tide of families’ education debt, but it would also make the path to paying for college more difficult for some families. 

Project 2025 does not call for a change to the Pell grant program, which provides federal funding for students from low-income families to attend college. Some advocates have called for doubling the annual maximum allotment, which is $7,395 for the 2024-2025 school year, far below the cost to attend many colleges. — Meredith Kolodner and Olivia Sanchez

Student loan forgiveness 

Project 2025 would end the prospect of student loan forgiveness, which has already been largely blocked by federal courts; the Biden administration, in a sort of game of Whac-a-Mole, has proposed still more forgiveness programs that are being fought by Republican state attorneys general and others. Project 2025 would also dramatically restrict what’s known as “borrower defense to repayment,” which forgives loans borrowed to pay for colleges that closed or have been found to use illegal or deceptive marketing. Largely restricting the Education Department to collecting statistics, Project 2025 would shift responsibility for student loans to the Treasury Department. — Jon Marcus

The post How could Project 2025 change education? appeared first on KVIA.

Beanykin // Shutterstock

The surprisingly simple way cities could save people from extreme heat

House with angled roofs that use white corrugated metal.

The city is a growing paradox. Humanity needs its many efficiencies: people living more densely and taking up less land — with easy access to decarbonized public transportation — collaborating and innovating as urbanites have always done. But as the climate warms, city dwellers suffer extreme heat more than their rural counterparts as a result of what’s known as the urban heat island effect. All that concrete, asphalt, and brick absorbs the sun’s energy, accelerating urban temperatures well above those in the surrounding countryside. 

Grist reports that in the United States, heat already kills more people than any other form of extreme weather, and nowhere is it more dangerous than in cities. So scientists and urban designers are now scrambling to research and deploy countermeasures, especially in the Southwest — not more energy-chugging air conditioning, but more passive, simple cooling techniques. “Cool roofs,” for instance, bounce the sun’s energy back into space using special coatings or reflective shingles. And urban green spaces full of plants cool the surrounding air. 

“In the same way that the urban environment that we have built around us can exacerbate heat, it can also be modified to reduce that heat,” said Edith de Guzman, a researcher at UCLA and director of the Los Angeles Urban Cooling Collaborative. “If we also invested in increasing the reflectivity of existing materials in the built environment, we could reduce the number of ER visits and the number of deaths substantially, in some cases over 50 percent.”

While scientists have long known about the heat island effect, they’re getting more of the granular data they need to determine what interventions cities should invest in and where. Realizing the many benefits of greening cities with more vegetation at ground level, local governments have already been handing out incentives to plant more trees. But they could be doing much more to encourage the spread of cool roofs, which would make heat waves less dangerous.

New research suggests cities are ignoring the power of cool roofs at their own peril. A study in the journal Geophysical Research Letters earlier this month modeled how much cooler London would have been on the two hottest days in the extra-hot summer of 2018 if the city widely adopted cool roofs compared to other interventions, like green roofs, rooftop solar panels, and ground level vegetation. Though simple from an engineering standpoint, cool roofs turned out to be the most effective at bringing down temperatures.

“We considered it to be practicable everywhere,” said Oscar Brousse, a geographer who specializes in urban climatology at University College London and the study’s lead author. “Because in theory there is no reason — except heritage or protection by UNESCO or something like that — that would prevent you from doing it.”

Cool roofs have the luxury of scale: You can swap out basically any dark, heat-absorbing roof for one made of reflective materials, or simply paint the structure white. (Think about how much hotter you’d get on a 95-degree day wearing a black shirt than a white one.) Even clay roof tiles can be painted with light-colored coatings.

Putting them atop single-family homes is a bit trickier, given the proliferation of dark wooden shingles. “This is both about the industry getting locked into a specific type of roofing shingle and municipal building codes not pushing for anything better, despite a growing awareness of the importance of cool roofs,” said Vivek Shandas, who studies the urban heat island effect at Portland State University but wasn’t involved in the new study. 

With the right policies and incentives, though, cities can encourage the adoption of more reflective shingles. In 2015, Los Angeles became the first major city to require that all new residential construction come with cool roofs by default. While a cool roof can cost the same or slightly more than a traditional one, the Los Angeles Department of Water and Power offers rebates for homeowners to make the switch. But until more municipal codes push the industry to switch to cool roofs, “the wide adoption will remain woefully inadequate for the scale of the challenge we face,” Shandas said.

One tricky thing about the heat island effect is that no two neighborhoods warm up the same way. Differences in geography, like proximity to lakes that provide cooling and hills that block winds, help determine how hot a given neighborhood already gets and how effective different interventions might be. Wealthier neighborhoods tend to be greener to begin with, whereas lower-income neighborhoods have often been deliberately zoned to host more industrial activities — lots of big buildings and concrete that soak up heat. 

“Each neighborhood has its own unique signature of heat,” Shandas said. “We need to start from what’s on the ground and build from there, as opposed to taking, carte blanche, the entire city and throw a bunch of different interventions on it.”

While the new study found that widely deployed cool roofs could reduce temperatures across London by about 2 degrees Fahrenheit on average, in some places it’s by up to 3.6 degrees F. Both ground level vegetation and rooftop solar panels wouldn’t have that same sort of success: They’d lower temperatures in London by about half a degree F on average. Green roofs would decrease temperatures during the day, but then increase it again at night by releasing accumulated heat, so that, on average, the effects cancel each other out. 

To be clear, this study was just looking at temperatures, not the many other benefits of efforts to cool cities down. A green roof, for instance, serves as a refuge for native plant and animal species. Green spaces on the ground can also prevent flooding if consciously designed to be absorbent. And greenery is just straight-up nice, boosting the mental health of residents. 

While solar panels wouldn’t cool London as much as cool roofs, they could still provide a building with a host of climate-friendly benefits. Electricity from those panels could power ultra-efficient heat pumps, which provide warmth in the winter then reverse in the summer to act like air conditioners. “So even if you don’t decrease the temperature, you would have the means for decreasing it indoors and providing cool shelters,” Brousse said.

Deploying more air conditioners, however, would raise temperatures across London by 0.27 degrees F on average, but up to 1.8 degrees F in the dense city center. That’s because air conditioners cool a space by pumping indoor heat outdoors, essentially recycling heat across a metropolis. 

The research suggests that the more passive cooling techniques that cities deploy, the less reliant they’ll be on air conditioning to provide indoor shelter for the vulnerable. And the better that scientists and urban designers can characterize heat in a given neighborhood, the better they’ll be able to collaborate with that community on solutions. “We should resist the urge to just find one way to do it,” said de Guzman of the Los Angeles Urban Cooling Collaborative. “From a scientific and heat mitigation standpoint, we need to have a combined approach.”

The post The surprisingly simple way cities could save people from extreme heat appeared first on KVIA.

Getty Images // Sarah Porter for the 19th

What you need to know about Project 2025

Photo illustration of components and leaders of Project 2025 against black background.

Project 2025. You might be hearing about it. Vice President Kamala Harris brought it up July 23  during her first campaign event as the presumptive Democratic presidential nominee.

“We know we’ve got to take this seriously — and can you believe they put that thing in writing?” Harris said at the Milwaukee rally, referencing the 920-page policy blueprint, which was created by the conservative Heritage Foundation and lays out a far-right Christian vision for Donald Trump’s second White House term if he wins in November. It’s the latest “Mandate for Leadership” that the group has been releasing ahead of incoming presidential administrations since the early 1980s. 

The blueprint suggests transforming the FBI into a politically motivated entity; abolishing the Department of Education; and dismantling the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Association — which among other duties, tracks hurricanes — because it is part of a “colossal operation that has become one of the main drivers of the climate change alarm industry.” It would bar U.S. citizens from receiving federal housing aid if they live with anyone who is not a citizen or permanent legal resident and potentially terminate the legal status of approximately 500,000 “Dreamer” immigrants.

Trump has tried to distance himself from this vision for his next presidency, writing on his social media site Truth Social, “I know nothing about Project 2025,” The 19th reports. “I have not seen it, have no idea who is in charge of it, and unlike our very well received Republican Platform, had nothing to do with it.”

The views of Sen. JD Vance of Ohio, Trump’s pick for vice president, are in line with Heritage’s priorities. Vance has earned a 93 percent lifetime score from Heritage Action for America, the advocacy arm of the Heritage Foundation, during his short tenure in elected politics. The average score for a Republican senator is 61 percent. 

But CNN found that at least 140 people who worked in the Trump administration contributed to Project 2025 in some way. And, when Trump spoke at a Heritage Foundation dinner in 2022 as work on Project 2025 was underway, he said, “This is a great group and they’re going to lay the groundwork and detail plans for exactly what our movement will do, and what your movement will do, when the American people give us a colossal mandate to save America.” The Heritage Foundation is a Republican National Convention “partner” and hosted a day-long policy conference in Milwaukee during the RNC. 

Much of Project 2025 relates to gender, sexuality and race, aiming to end most all of the federal government’s efforts to achieve equity and even collect data that could be used to track outcomes across the public and private sectors. 

The blueprint encourages the next presidential administration to disband the Gender Policy Council created by Democratic President Joe Biden and undo all of its work. Heritage suggests eliminating diversity, equity and inclusion (DEI) programs across the federal government. The authors also want to take the following terms out of every rule and regulation: sexual orientation and gender identity (“SOGI”), DEI, gender, gender identity, gender equity, gender awareness, gender-sensitive, abortion, reproductive health and reproductive rights. 

Here are other elements of Project 2025 that would impact women and LGBTQ+ Americans:

LGBTQ+ rights

Project 2025 envisions a federal government that denies the existence of transgender people, undermines the rights of same-sex married couples and dismantles services for LGBTQ+ Americans wherever possible, primarily via the Department of Health and Human Services, which the Heritage Foundation proposes renaming the Department of Life. 

The plan calls for the newly named agency to take the official stance that families are made up of a married father and mother and children and to redirect federal funds to support a “biblically based” definition of family. It calls for replacing policies related to LGBTQ+ equity with those that “support the formation of stable, married, nuclear families” and would protect adoption and foster care services that refuse to work with LGBTQ+ married couples. It states that children should be raised by their “biological” fathers and mothers because the “male-female dyad is essential to human nature.” 

Project 2025 equates the act of being transgender, or “transgender ideology,” to pornography and declares that it should be outlawed. It aims to cut federal funding for gender-affirming care for both children and adults, which is in line with Trump’s own policy proposals. At the Department of Justice, Project 2025 suggests revisiting the Biden administration’s assertion that transgender minors have a right to gender-affirming care. The plan aims to allow more healthcare workers to opt out of providing such care if they say they object to it. 

The plan’s authors describe gender-affirming care for youth as a “social contagion” that especially affects young girls, writing: “The next Administration should take particular note of how radical gender ideology is having a devastating effect on school-aged children today.”

Project 2025 suggests that the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) should “immediately end its collection of data on gender identity, which legitimizes the unscientific notion that men can become women (and vice versa).” The report also calls for the National Institutes of Health to fund studies into “the short-term and long-term negative effects” of gender-affirming care, from social affirmation to surgery, and the likelihood of convincing children that they are not transgender through therapy.  

The plan’s authors also want to reverse policies adopted by the Biden administration to expand the scope of sex discrimination in federal nondiscrimination protections based on the Supreme Court’s decision in Bostock v. Clayton County. That landmark case found that LGBTQ+ workers are protected from workplace discrimination and that gender identity is a protected class of sex.

They write: “The President should direct agencies to rescind regulations interpreting sex discrimination provisions as prohibiting discrimination on the basis of sexual orientation, gender identity, transgender status, sex characteristics” and instead direct them to “focus their enforcement of sex discrimination laws on the biological binary meaning of ‘sex.'”

Reproductive rights

In Project 2025, a fundamental premise is that abortion is not health care — and the CDC would be banned from promoting it as such. 

The document’s authors want the renamed Department of Life to collect data on people who have abortions, using “every available tool, including the cutting of funds, to ensure that every state reports exactly how many abortions take place within its borders, at what gestational age of the child, for what reason, the mother’s state of residence, and by what method.” They urge the agency to rescind Biden administration guidance that EMTALA, a decades-old emergency medicine law, requires that hospitals provide abortion care in emergency situations. They also call to eliminate the agency’s Reproductive Healthcare Access Task Force and replace it with an anti-abortion task force. 

Project 2025 says the Food and Drug Administration should reverse its 2000 approval of the medication abortion drug mifepristone. They also encourage the Department of Justice to announce a campaign to enforce the long dormant 1873 Comstock Act, which prohibits the mailing of obscene materials and articles intended for “producing abortion.” This is another route to restrict access to abortion medication — a top priority of the anti-abortion movement given it can be mailed across state lines. 

Project 2025 suggests prohibiting Planned Parenthood from receiving Medicaid funds, even for non-abortion services, and instead direct it to “health care centers that provide real health care for women.” It would also remove emergency contraception from the contraception mandate in the Affordable Care Act so private insurers no longer have to cover it. 

It also calls for the Department of Justice to “take legal action against local officials — including district attorneys — who deny American citizens the ‘equal protection of the laws’ by refusing to prosecute criminal offenses in their jurisdictions.” The left-leaning Center for American Progress interprets this section as a push “to use federal law enforcement agencies, like the Department of Justice, to compel these local elected officials to enforce far-right policy priorities or face federal lawsuits, removal from office, or potentially criminal prosecutions.” Time magazine reported that in the two years since the Supreme Court ended the federal right to an abortion and states began banning it, nearly 100 local prosecutors have said they will not bring cases against individuals who seek or provide abortions. 

Education

Project 2025 urges the next administration to work with Congress to pass legislation eliminating the Department of Education. 

The authors suggest repealing education policies from the Obama and Biden administrations that recognize nonbinary and transgender identities. They also want the next administration to rescind a Biden-era revision to Title IX — a 1972 civil rights law that prohibits sex-based discrimination by educational programs that receive federal money — that strengthened protections for sexual assault victims and LGBTQ+ students, something Republicans in Congress have tried but failed to do. Project 2025 says the next administration should reimplement Title IX interpretations from the Trump administration that defined “sex” in the statute as only “biological sex at birth.” 

Project 2025 urges ending the Public Service Loan Forgiveness program, which provides student loan relief to borrowers who work in federal, state, local or tribal governments, or for a nonprofit organization. 

The authors also weigh in on ongoing debates over instruction about race in schools, which conservatives have argued makes white students feel bad. They would “not require students or teachers to believe that individuals are guilty or responsible for the actions of others based on race or ethnicity.” 

They take aim at policies that impact trans students. They would also prohibit public educators from using names of students other than on their birth certificates without written permission from their parents or guardians and from using pronouns that are different than the sex assigned to the student at birth without permission, or at all if is “contrary to the employee’s or contractor’s religious or moral activities.”

They propose eliminating Head Start, a federal program that provides educational readiness opportunities to children from qualifying families during their first five years. 

Workforce

Project 2025’s authors believe there has been a “DEI Revolution” at the Department of Labor and want to reverse it, writing: “Under this managerialist left-wing race and gender ideology, every aspect of labor policy became a vehicle with which to advance race, sex, and other classifications and discriminate against conservative and religious viewpoints on these subjects and others, including pro-life views.”

They urge the next president to issue executive orders prohibiting the federal government from paying for any critical race theory training and prohibiting racial classification and quotas. They want the Equal Employment Opportunity Commission (EEOC) to stop collecting employment data based on race and ethnicity, which they say “can then be used to support a charge of discrimination under a disparate impact theory,” which in turn may “lead to racial quotas.” They want to prohibit the collection of this data from both private and public employers.

Project 2025 calls on Congress to pass a law that requires employers who provide benefits for abortion services to provide equal or greater benefits to support pregnancy, childbirth, parenthood and adoption. They want the law to “clarify that no employer is required to provide any accommodations or benefits for abortion.”

They also call for increased accommodations for working mothers. They want Congress to “incentivize on-site childcare” and amend the Fair Labor Standards Act to clarify that if an employer provides on-site child care as a benefit, it is not subtracted from an employee’s hourly pay or salary. They also want protections for lactating parents. 

Project 2025 also believes the Labor Department should relax restrictions on child labor and “amend its hazard-order regulations to permit teenage workers access to work in regulated jobs with proper training and parental consent.”

The post What you need to know about Project 2025 appeared first on KVIA.

Marcus E Jones // Shutterstock

Does where you live determine how you eat? New study uncovers America’s emotional eating patterns

People walking down French Quarter where restaurants and bars are along Bourbon Street in New Orleans.

Where you live may influence your eating and health habits more than you think. 

Do you savor every meal or squeeze in a sandwich during your commute? Are you more likely to indulge in comfort foods while watching your favorite show or try new foods dining out with friends? Personality plays a part, but a 2024 Hims study shows regionality may also play a significant role in eating behavior. 

Hims compares America’s most anxious, automatic, enthusiastic, escapist, and uplifting foodie capitals.

What Are Eating Patterns?

There’s more to weight loss than just diet and exercise. While nutrition and movement play a large role, there’s also a behavioral component to holistic weight loss. A team of psychologists and weight loss experts at Hims have identified five eating patterns that typically describe people’s primary eating habits: anxious, automatic, enthusiastic, escapist, and uplifting. 

• Anxious: I tend to eat when I’m stressed, anxious, or can’t sleep.
• Automatic: I tend to eat on autopilot, while multitasking.
• Enthusiastic: I make food a priority. The majority of my social activities revolve around eating.
• Escapist: I tend to be an emotional eater, and eat to escape or indulge in an emotion.
• Uplifting: I eat when I’m bored, to change my mood, or to reward myself.

How America Eats

Hims asked people which eating pattern best describes their primary eating habits (selecting all that apply) and looked at trends in major cities across the country to determine if where they live impacts their eating habits. 84% of Americans fit into one of five eating patterns. Here’s how the country stacks up.

• Enthusiastic eaters: 32%
• Automatic eaters: 27%
• Uplifting eaters: 27%
• Anxious eaters: 25%
• Escapist eaters: 21%
• None of the above: 16%

Hims

America’s Most Enthusiastic Eaters: New Orleans

Infographic showing Hims’ stats on how America eats.

The Big Easy is known for its world-renowned foodie culture. So it’s no wonder that New Orleans tops the list of America’s most Enthusiastic Eaters, with nearly half (45%) of New Orleanians reporting that the majority of their social activities revolve around food, compared to 32% of Americans overall. 

So, what’s the recipe for their enthusiasm? First, they are quite a bit more social than the rest of America. 66% of residents of New Orleans describe themselves as “extroverted” as compared to just 31% of the nationally representative population. Prioritizing food in one’s social life is a key part of being an Enthusiastic Eater. 

Second, they’re experimental. 60% of New Orleans residents identify as such compared to 39% of the U.S. population. Likely, they are open to—and enthusiastic about—trying new cuisine. 

Lastly, they are more likely than almost any city in the country to self-identify as “multicultural.” Two-thirds (66%) say they cross multiple races, ethnicities, or cultures, as compared to 30% of Americans overall. The variety of cultures in their own backyard no doubt makes them enthusiastic to “culture sample” through food.

Percent who identify as Enthusiastic Eaters

1. New Orleans, LA, 45%
2. San Diego, CA, 44%
3. New York, NY, 40%
4. Austin, TX, 40%
5. San Antonio, TX, 39%
6. Las Vegas, NV, 39%
7. Philadelphia, PA, 38%
8. Nashville, TN, 38%
9. Chicago, IL, 38%
10. Los Angeles, CA, 37%

Nutrition Tips For Enthusiastic Eaters

• Practice mindfulness. When social activities revolve around food, opt for high-quality, nutritious options. Incorporate home-cooked meals into gatherings by hosting potlucks where everyone brings a healthy dish for a fun and nourishing experience. 
• Balance food-centered events with physical activities. Consider getting outside for a stroll through Central Park, the French Quarter, or your city’s green space or cultural center before or after enjoying your favorite foods.

America’s Most Automatic Eaters: Atlanta

44% of Atlanta residents describe themselves as “Automatic Eaters” who multitask and tend to eat on autopilot. This compares to just 27% of the country who says they do the same.

Atlanta is also the top city to report that they are worried about their weight, with 33% of residents saying it tops their list of stressors vs. 25% of Americans overall. 

Distracted or “mindless” eating can be a key contributor to consuming more calories than needed to nourish your body. When you eat on autopilot, it’s very easy to underestimate the volume of food you consume in a day. 

Percent who identify as Automatic Eaters

1. Atlanta, GA, 44%
2. New York, NY, 38%
3. Austin, TX, 36%
4. Salt Lake City, UT, 35%
5. St. Louis, MO, 34%
6. Tampa, FL, 33%
7. Orlando, FL, 33%
8. Phoenix, AZ, 33%
9. Chicago, IL, 33%
10. Houston, TX, 32%

Nutrition Tips For Automatic Eaters

• Be intentional. Designate a specific area for meals that’s free from distractions. Creating a dedicated eating space encourages you to slow down and enjoy your food. Furthermore, choose specific times for meals where you focus solely on eating. 
• Avoid distractions like screens or multitasking during these moments to cultivate mindfulness and enhance your eating experience. 
• Meal prep. Plan and prepare your meals ahead of time so you have nutritions meals at the ready, reducing the temptation to eat automatically.

America’s Most Uplifting Eaters: San Antonio

San Antonio, Texas residents are one-third more likely than other top cities to say they are “Uplifting Eaters” using food to improve their mood when they’re feeling down (39% vs. 27%, respectively). 

While eating to get out of a funk is common—as mentioned, 27% of Americans identify with this eating pattern most, making it the number two eating pattern after Enthusiastic Eaters—what Hims found in its research is that San Antonio needs some self-love. 

San Antonio residents report feeling less emotionally stable than Americans overall (51% vs. 59%, respectively).

Percent who identify as Uplifting Eaters

1. San Antonio, TX, 39%
2. Sacramento, CA, 34%
3. Salt Lake City, UT, 33%
4. Houston, TX, 33%
5. Atlanta, GA, 33%
6. New Haven, CT, 32%
7. Washington, DC, 32%
8. Nashville, TN, 32%
9. Baltimore, MD, 32%
10. Greenville, SC, 32%

Nutrition Tips For Uplifting Eaters

• Try journaling. Keep a food journal that not only tracks what you eat, but also your mood during meals. Reflecting on how certain foods impact your emotions can help you make more mindful choices in the future. Other creative outlets are a good way to improve your mental state, as well. 
• Use cooking as a way to uplift your mood by experimenting with new recipes or cuisines. Invite friends over for dinner and cook together, turning meal prep into a fun and engaging activity. 

America’s Most Anxious Eaters: Salt Lake City

Statistically speaking, Salt Lake City residents are stressed out. 61% of Salt Lake City residents rate themselves as a 4 or 5 on being “stressed” as compared to just 37% of Americans overall. 

They’re also the most likely in the country to say they turn to food when they’re stressed out, anxious, or can’t sleep: 38% identified as Anxious Eaters vs. 25% of total respondents. 

Percent who identify as Anxious Eaters

1. Salt Lake City, 38%
2. Charlotte, NC, 37%
3. St. Louis, MO, 35%
4. San Antonio, TX, 34%
5. Indianapolis, IN, 30%
6. Washington, DC, 30%
7. Greenville, SC, 29%
8. Oklahoma City, OK, 29%
9. Minneapolis, MN, 29%
10. Tampa, FL, 28%

Nutrition Tips For Anxious Eaters

• Take a walk to destress and get your mind off food. Healthy coping mechanisms, like exercise, listening to music, playing with a pet, reading, playing sports, or calling a friend are all great ways to conquer stress and avoid self-soothing with food. 
• Stock up on healthy snacks. Having healthy snacks on hand, especially when you’re feeling anxious, can help you make choices in the moment that you’ll feel good about later. 
• Choose foods that may help with anxiety. Did you know that what you eat can impact your anxiety? Check out this list of the best foods for anxiety.  

America’s Most Escapist Eaters: Minneapolis

Residents of Minnesota’s biggest metropolitan hub—Minneapolis-St. Paul—were the most likely to classify themselves as “Escapist Eaters” who use food to escape certain emotions (31% vs. 21% of respondents overall).

Minneapolis also ranked #1 in emotional stability, with 74% of Minneapolis and St. Paul residents saying they were highly emotionally stable (a 5 on a 5-point scale) or emotionally stable (a 4 on a 5-point scale) as compared to just 59% of Americans overall. And 78% report being “happy” vs. 66% of the rest of the country. 

Percent who identify as Escapist Eaters

1. Minneapolis-St. Paul, MN, 31%
2. San Francisco, CA, 29%
3. Chicago, IL, 29%
4. Oklahoma City, OK, 29%
5. Norfolk, VA, 27%
6. Orlando, FL, 27%
7. Dallas, TX, 27%
8. Sacramento, CA, 26%
9. Miami, FL, 26%
10. Salt Lake City, UT, 26%

Nutrition Tips For Escapist Eaters

• Check in with yourself emotionally before indulging. Emotional awareness can be a key component of a healthier eating habit. Set reminders on your phone to pause and assess your feelings, helping you differentiate between emotional and physical hunger. 
• Consider channeling your emotions into artistic activities such as painting, writing, or playing music instead of food. These activities can provide a therapeutic release for your feelings and reduce the urge to eat for purely emotional reasons.

Data & Methodology

This study is based on a 5,504-person online survey, which included 5,000 18-to-65-year-old respondents in the top 50 metropolitan areas (100 respondents per city) and a nationally representative sample of 504 18-to-65-year-old respondents to contextualize results. The study was fielded in May 2024.

Hims asked respondents, “Which of the following best describe your primary eating habits?” and asked them to select all that apply. Findings were analyzed by more than 100 demographic and psychographic cuts, including city, region, gender (when Hims refers to “women” and “men,” this includes all people who self-identify as such), age, race and ethnicity, relationship status, parenting status, sexual orientation (heterosexual, bisexual, gay, lesbian, pansexual, asexual, queer, etc.), and political affiliation, among other areas of interest. 

All data in this study are from this source, unless otherwise noted. Independent research firm, Culture Co-op, conducted and analyzed research and findings. Get the data.

The post Does where you live determine how you eat? New study uncovers America's emotional eating patterns appeared first on KVIA.

Felix Mizioznikov // Shutterstock

NFL Inflation: How ticket and concession prices have changed over time

Aerial photo inside Metlife Stadium in Rutherford, NJ.

Between new stadiums, ownership changes, and player salaries, the economics of football are changing from the top down. For fans, this means increased costs to both see NFL games in person and watch their favorite NFL teams on TV.

To see exactly how prices have risen for NFL fans, the FinanceBuzz team compared the average costs of attending an NFL game in person, including tickets, beer, hot dogs, and parking, for every NFL team over the past decade. This helped determine which NFL teams’ fans have had to adjust their budgets the most and least to support their favorite squads live in recent years.  

Key findings

• On average, the cost of going to an NFL game has gone up $43 (39%) since 2013. 
• The average costs to attend home games for the Las Vegas Raiders, Cleveland Browns, and Tampa Bay Buccaneers have risen by at least 85% since 2013, the highest in the NFL.
• The Carolina Panthers have raised beer prices more than any other team, going from $4.36 for a 16-ounce pour in 2013 to $10.56 in 2023—a 142% increase.
• The NFL teams with the most consistent game day costs over the past decade include the Dallas Cowboys, New York Jets, and New England Patriots.

FinanceBuzz

Cost of an NFL game compared to inflation

Infographic showing the cost of attending an NFL game, 2013 vs. 2023.

The total cost of attending an NFL game includes tickets, concessions, and transportation. To get a comprehensive handle on how those costs have changed, FinanceBuzz calculated how much it would cost for a fan to attend a game with a friend by totaling the cost for a ticket, beer, hotdog, and a split parking pass.

The game day experience for Las Vegas Raiders fans has gotten the most expensive since 2013, going from an average of $95 per person that year to $198 in 2023. That’s a 108% increase, the highest of any team in the league. Of course, the Raiders moved towns and into one of the newest and most expensive stadiums in the league during this period.

Similarly, the San Francisco 49ers have seen game day costs increase by 83% since 2013, a time period that saw the team move into the brand-new Levi’s Stadium in 2014. The team has also been one of the most successful in the entire NFL over the last decade, appearing in five NFC championship games and two Super Bowls since 2013. 

Where NFL experiences are getting less expensive

As with most things in the U.S., rising prices for NFL games aren’t exactly news to many. As the cost of goods has risen in the last decade, more Americans are looking for ways to save money, better ways to budget, or even ways to earn more money for the things they want to afford. Of note, however, is that not all fan bases have seen drastic increases in prices, and some have even lowered their prices relative to inflation.

Costs to attend a Dallas Cowboys game decreased by 1% since 2013, going from an average cost of $162 to $160 in the last decade. While still a slight increase, prices to see a New York Jets game have increased only 5% (compared to the national rate of 31%), and surprisingly, prices for a New England Patriots game have only gone up 6% in the decade where they earned three Super Bowl titles. Now that’s a deflation we can get behind.

Overall, 11 teams raised prices at a rate greater than the national rate of inflation (31%) since 2013, while the average NFL price increase was 39%.

FinanceBuzz

NFL teams where ticket prices have risen the most

Chart showing NFL teams with the highest ticket price increases.

Tickets typically make up the largest chunk of costs associated with attending an NFL game in person, so major changes to ticket prices can really impact a fan’s bottom line.

Once again, the Raiders’ ticket prices increased the most, with the average ticket price increasing by more than $100 and 160% from 2013 to 2023. Their new home city and new stadium played major roles in that change.

For some of the other teams where ticket prices have risen the most, on-field success leading to increased ticket demand explains why prices have changed so much in the last 10 years. For instance, the Kansas City Chiefs have won three Super Bowls since drafting quarterback Patrick Mahomes in 2017. That sustained success has helped fuel a 103% increase in ticket costs over the last 10 years, the third-highest of any team. Of note, these prices reflect tickets sold by the team, not aftermarket or third-party sales.

FinanceBuzz

NFL teams where beer prices have risen the most

Chart showing NFL teams with the highest beer price increases.

Enjoying a beer at the game is an integral part of the game day experience for many NFL fans, although it costs more in some stadiums than others.

In 2013, the Carolina Panthers had the most affordable beer of any NFL team, at just $4.36 for a 16-ounce pour. In 2023, however, the Panthers had the 10th most expensive beer in the league, charging $10.56 for the same amount. That is a 142% increase, the highest of any team in the league.

Four other teams doubled their beer prices between 2013 and 2023, with the Los Angeles Chargers raising prices by 121%, the Philadelphia Eagles increasing prices by 119%, the New Orleans Saints raising prices by 112%, and the Los Angeles Rams increasing beer prices by 105%.

How to combat rising ticket prices

While ticket prices aren’t always in fans’ control, there are some ways fans can save on attending in person.

For instance, the secondary market can sometimes actually offer lower-priced tickets than buying directly from teams. While prices on sites like StubHub and SeatGeek will always be a function of supply and demand, ticket prices can be lowered (often below face value) by factors like the popularity of a visiting team, injuries to star players, or even the weather. There’s also data that shows NFL ticket prices significantly decrease closer to game time.

Whether you’re buying directly from the team or on the secondary market, using a cash back credit card can help offset some ticket costs and fees. Similarly, some travel credit cards may offer credits or rewards for rideshares (like Uber and Lyft) to games, putting something extra in your pocket while also saving you the cost of a parking pass.

Lastly, in the event you’re unable to go to a game, there are plenty of ways to stream NFL games from home even if they’re out of market.

Manage your game day spending

• Tackle your finances throughout the entire season. As concessions and ticket prices can add up, NFL fans might use these recommended budgeting apps to stay on track.
• Make extra cash from your new football merch. Certain cash back credit cards offer generous welcome offers and won’t charge you an annual fee.
• Earn points on your stadium trips. It doesn’t matter if you’re a season pass holder or someone who goes to a tailgate every once in a while. Another easy way to earn high rewards is by signing up for a gas credit card.

Methodology

All pricing data was collected from the 2013 and 2023 versions of the NFL Fan Cost Index, which the Team Marketing Report compiles annually.

Inflation rates are based on the Bureau of Labor Statistics’ CPI Inflation Calculator.

The post NFL Inflation: How ticket and concession prices have changed over time appeared first on KVIA.

VH-studio // Shutterstock

How school counselors can address the youth mental health crisis

Three teens face sitting in chairs talking with a school counselor in a library setting.

America is experiencing a mental health crisis, and mental health struggles amongst the nation’s youth are intensifying. Student mental health is in a precarious place, with children and teens exposed to more information, more social contact, and more discord than ever before. The student mental health crisis is pervasive.

The good news is that Americans are more aware of the importance of mental health now more than ever. Age-old taboos are finally lifting. Even the federal government is throwing its support behind mental health initiatives: in 2023, the Department of Health and Human Services (HHS) and the Health Resources Services Administration (HRSA) made available $25 million to expand primary care, including mental health services, in schools. Although it’s not a complete solution, it is a start. To end the student mental health crisis, more funding, training, attention, and collaboration is needed. 

School counselors are on the front lines of the student mental health crisis. Their involvement is critical in making schools the uplifting, inclusive, and safe places they need to be. Counseling Schools looks into how school counselors are boosting student mental health, and what more can be done to support them in their mission.

Understanding the Student Mental Health Crisis

“The mental health crisis has escalated to an alarming degree,” says Allison Paolini, school counseling program director and assistant professor of school counseling at Arkansas State University. “According to the CDC, in 2021, it was reported that more than 42 percent of students experienced ongoing sadness or loss of hope.”

The ingredients of the student mental health crisis were present before the Covid-19 pandemic: according to a study in JAMA Pediatrics, anxiety increased by 29 percent and depression increased by 27 percent in children and youth between 2016 and 2020. 

But the effects of the enforced isolation and persistent uncertainty brought on by the pandemic have carried over after it’s receded, and going back to the classroom doesn’t mean going back to the way things were previously. Students still experience all the mental health stressors of adults, plus some darkly unique ones.

“Gun violence is very problematic universally and has a detrimental impact on student mental health,” Paolini says. “Students who experience or witness violence are more likely to experience depression and anxiety, have lower test scores, decreased enrollment in school, may experience survivor’s guilt and post-traumatic stress disorder (PTSD), are more likely to experience truancy, may have difficulty concentrating, and may struggle to build peer relationships. This has a monumentally negative impact on one’s overall health and wellbeing.”

The student mental health crisis reaches into every demographic, but some groups are more affected than others. According to the CDC, LGBTQIA+ students, female students, and students across racial and ethnic groups are more likely to experience negative feelings. Black students more likely to attempt suicide than students of other races and ethnicities. Nearly half (45 percent) of all LGBTQIA+ students in 2021 seriously considered attempting suicide. 

Diverse students have diverse problems, and that requires a multi-tooled response. As the acuity of issues that students face is increasing, it is paramount for school counselors to be trained to conduct assessments, understand protocols, as well as provide resources and referrals to students experiencing suicidality or self-harm.

“It is essential for school counselors to individualize their approach,” Paolini says. “There is not a universal one-size-fits-all approach to counseling. School counselors must be eclectic and use various skills, modalities, techniques, and best practices that are most impactful for each student they work with.”

How School Counselors Address the Student Mental Health Crisis

School counselors sit at a critical juncture and are often a student’s first encounter with a mental health professional who has specialized training in social and emotional wellbeing. School counselors can use techniques such as cognitive behavioral therapy (CBT) and solution-focused brief therapy (SFBT) to modify unhealthy thoughts, reframe personal problems, and take a proactive approach in finding solutions. 

Although school counselors play an integral role in fostering student wellness and providing support, there are still limits to what school counselors can do on their own. It is critical that school counselors practice within their scope of competency and provide referrals to those who need additional support.

“School counselors cannot diagnose and are not licensed to provide more intensive counseling that is sometimes required, specifically if a student is struggling with an underlying mental health disorder,” Paolini says. “It is crucial for school counselors to collaborate with mental health counselors so that students have the services that they need to flourish.”

Connecting students with mental health services—and with mental telehealth services in rural and underserved areas—is vital. Virtual wellness centers, resource-laden personal websites including Google Sites, and even well-designed Google Forms can all help enhance the connection between school setting and mental health services. 

School counselors themselves can also contribute to a positive learning environment by incorporating Kindness Week, starting an anti-bullying program, promoting diversity, safety, and inclusion, and advocating for the integration of social-emotional learning (SEL) in the school’s curriculum. SEL teaches students imperative skills such as time and stress management, leadership, accountability, empathy, communication, coping, conflict resolution, optimism, motivation, and resilience.

“These are life skills that help students to be prepared for their post-secondary endeavors,” Paolini says. 

The student mental health crisis has multiple fronts, and the digital arena—particularly social media—should not be neglected. Paolini notes that most students who end up carrying out acts of violence post about it on social media before doing so. And bullying, which is pervasive nationwide and a major stressor on students and a detriment to their mental health, is even more damaging when taken onto the internet virtually: social media allows cyberbullying to have a larger audience and platform. 

“School counselors must encourage families to monitor their child’s social media accounts, as doing so is crucial for reducing cyberbullying,” Paolini says.

Addressing the student mental health crisis is a Herculean task: school counselors can’t do it on their own; it truly is a collaborative effort. Students, teachers, administrators, parents, policymakers, and other mental health professionals must all contribute and work together to facilitate positive change. 

“The most important part of the counseling relationship is having a strong therapeutic alliance, as this helps to build trust and amplify self-disclosure,” Paolini says. “It is necessary for school counselors to work diligently to build strong therapeutic alliances with students and other critical stakeholders. More than years of experience or modality used, one’s ability to create a solid therapeutic alliance has the greatest impact on stakeholder growth.”

The Future of Student Mental Health

There are ample reasons to look at the future through a positive lens. Children and teens are highly resilient. Minorities are more visible. And while the Covid-19 pandemic worsened the student mental health crisis, it also helped raise more awareness to the importance of mental health and wellness on a broader scale.

“Students will continue to struggle with mental health, but I am an eternal optimist,” Paolini says. “More and more school counselors are recognizing the need to be knowledgeable about mental health disorders so that they can best support students who are struggling. And more school counselors are implementing prevention programs and facilitating workshops to address the importance of mental health and wellness.”

School counselors play an instrumental role in addressing the student mental health crisis. But they need reinforcements. Research has shown that the ideal ratio of students to school counselors at any given school is approximately 250-to-1; the national average is over 400-to-1. 

“In regard to government policies, there needs to be more focus on mental health, and additional money needs to be allocated to the field to ensure there are enough school counselors and helping professionals at each school,” Paolini says. “As of now, the demand outweighs the supply.”

Outside of the school counselor role, more bridges are needed between the mental health and educational communities. Additional funding, awareness, and collaboration can help create uplifting learning environments that are more inclusive, protective, secure, engaging, and empowering. Student mental health needs to be met with a team effort between school counselors, teachers, families, mental health professionals, and the community at large.

“Children and teens are our future,” Paolini says. “We must work diligently and intentionally to make sure that they have the help, guidance, and mentorship that they need to identify and build upon their intrinsic strengths, believe in their innate abilities, reach their fullest potential, and be their best selves.”

The post How school counselors can address the youth mental health crisis appeared first on KVIA.

Proxima Studio // Shutterstock

Are streaming services being abandoned for better options?

Concept of streaming service illustrated by hand with remote in foreground, blurred background of streaming choices on tv screen.

Streaming services are becoming the norm for a lot of our entertainment needs, but it has plenty of shortcomings. This is why it’s simultaneously surprising and also a little bit unsurprising that physical media is making a small comeback. According to Giant Freakin Robot, the BBC reported that entertainment retailer HMV reported “physical visual” sales rose by 5 percent in the first half of 2024, with 4K and Blu-ray releases doing “particularly well.”

Phil Halliday, managing director of HMV, claimed that the increase in sales is likely due to the changing conversation around streaming services, saying, “When streaming first came out, I think a lot of people saw it as cheap and with huge breadth of choice,” and, “but I’m not sure people see it like that now.”

Halliday also noted how CD and vinyl sales have increased in recent years, so clearly there’s something to people wanting more physical media in their lives.

Some Streaming Services Are Profitable, But At A Price

Halliday’s statements about streaming services aren’t necessarily wrong from a social sentiment standpoint, as many people have complained about the anti-consumer decisions of companies like Netflix in recent years. Price hikes, crackdowns on password sharing, and other decisions have made people angry with their streaming options, and it doesn’t help that there’s so much competition in the streaming space that you have to pay more than cable just to watch all of your favorite shows.

Physical Media Isn’t Subject To Corporate Whims

Physical media may be pricey too, but it has the added advantage of letting you own your favorite shows and movies, rather than leaving them to the whims of a bunch of corporate streaming rights battles.

There’s also the fact that even if you’re subscribed to every streaming service out there, you might still not find the content you want. Some films and TV shows only live in the physical media world, with no option to stream them anywhere. There’s also the fact that the streaming version of shows and films don’t come with all of the bonus features and content you get with a DVD or Blu-ray.

Of course, this bit of good news about an increase in physical media sales comes with the caveat that we’re only looking at the numbers of one major entertainment retailer and not necessarily the industry as a whole. Meanwhile, streaming services like Netflix have outperformed Wall Street expectations in recent years and continue to be major players in the entertainment industry.

Physical Media Is A Commitment

While it’s good to see physical media get some love, it’s safe to say that streaming is still going to be the more convenient and affordable choice for many.

Streaming services are also pretty low commitment, as you can get access to hundreds or thousands of shows and films even if you might not like them.

When you go to buy physical media, it’s pretty likely that you’re already a fan and just want to own a copy for your collection or to ensure you always have a quality version on hand to watch. Still, it’s great to know that physical media is still important to many and that we’re not completely at the whims of streaming corporations.

The post Are streaming services being abandoned for better options? appeared first on KVIA.

Linaimages // Shutterstock

How to stay safe from AI voice scams

A man recording his voice on a phone.

Robocalls made using AI-generated voices are now illegal in the US, according to a new ruling by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC).

The move comes in the wake of a significant rise in AI voice cloning scams, Spokeo reports. In these fairly sophisticated scams, criminals use AI-generated voices to impersonate politicians, celebrities or even close family members with the ultimate goal of convincing victims to comply with some fraudulent request, like sending them cash.

Here’s what you need to know about AI voice scams, including how they work and, most importantly, how to protect yourself. 

Understanding AI Scams

AI scams leverage artificial intelligence to mimic human behavior, language, interactions and even decision-making processes. This then enables scammers to execute various deceptive schemes aimed at defrauding individuals and organizations.

These scams can take several forms, including:

• AI voice clone scams: Here, criminals use AI to create fake voices resembling those of trusted individuals (such as family members or friends), corporate executives, public officials, celebrities or even entities like banks and government institutions. The scammers then use these voices to dupe victims into making payments or sharing sensitive information.
• Deepfake scams: Here, malicious persons use AI to create fake images or videos that convincingly depict real people doing or saying things they didn’t actually do or say. The fabricated visuals can be used to manipulate opinions, spread disinformation or even blackmail individuals.
• Phishing email and text scams: Here, criminals use AI to generate personalized emails or texts that mimic the style of legitimate companies or organizations. The aim here is to trick you into divulging sensitive information or clicking on links that may lead to malware or other malicious content.

How Do AI Voice Scams Work?

A specific type of AI voice scam that has been making a lot of headlines recently involves criminals cloning the voice of a family member and then using it to convince a loved one to send the scammer money.

This is a relatively elaborate attack that involves several phases.

First, the attacker finds a voice sample of the person they are trying to impersonate. They can get it from a variety of sources, including the person’s social media or from public interviews they’ve participated in. Recent advances in fake voice generation technology means that sometimes, all a scammer needs is just a few seconds of audio recording. 

The scammer then feeds this sample into a voice cloning tool which creates a digital replica of the voice capable of producing speech that sounds remarkably similar to the original.  Next, the criminal uses the AI-generated voice to record audio stating that they are in a difficult situation and need money.  

They might fabricate scenarios such as being involved in an accident and needing cash to settle with the other driver, getting arrested and requiring money for bail, or being stranded in an unfamiliar or dangerous area and needing funds to purchase a plane ticket home.

The deceitful voice message is then sent to the intended victim, typically via voicemail. The voice can be so persuasive that many recipients will send money without any hesitation after hearing it.

How to Stay Safe From AI Voice Scams

While it can be difficult to differentiate a fake voice from a real one, there are several proactive measures you can take to protect yourself from becoming a victim of an AI voice cloning scam.

Verify the caller’s identity

If you receive a suspicious or unexpected voicemail, particularly one that involves money, take a moment to verify the caller through other means. For example, reach out to the person of interest using a different number you’ve previously used to communicate with them. You can also ask them to call you back at a number you know is theirs or trust.

Treat all urgent requests with suspicion

Scammers will always try to create a sense of urgency with their fraudulent requests. They want you to overlook your better judgment and make a hasty decision. If the caller urges you to act fast, that’s a red flag.

Trust your instincts

If something feels off, trust your instincts. It’s better to err on the side of caution and take steps to verify the authenticity of a call than to become the victim of a scam.

Educate yourself about AI voice scams

Knowledge and awareness are crucial defenses against AI scams. Stay updated with all the latest trends in AI scams. Share your knowledge or experiences with others to build a communal defense against these scams.

Limit personal information sharing

Another way to avoid falling prey to AI voice scammers is to limit the amount of personal information you share online. Remember that scammers can use personal details they’ve taken from social media and other online sources to make their impersonations more believable. 

Check for anomalies in the voice message

Even though AI-voice clones can be highly convincing, they might still exhibit subtle anomalies or inconsistencies. For example, pay attention to unusual pauses, odd tones and cadences, or background noises that don’t fit the context of the message.

Report suspected scams

If you encounter what you believe to be an AI voice or deepfake scam, report it to the appropriate authorities, such as the Federal Trade Commission (FTC) or your local consumer protection agency. Reporting can help authorities track the perpetrators and thus combat these scams.

Key Takeaways

Understanding how AI voice cloning scams work and implementing some of the preventative measures outlined here can reduce the risk for you and those around you.

If you’ve already fallen victim, the best thing to do is take immediate action. Report the matter to your bank and the appropriate authorities. You might still be able to recover your funds, though it’s not guaranteed. Sharing your experience with others can also help raise awareness, making it harder for scammers to find new victims.

Looking ahead, reverse phone lookup tools like Spokeo can offer protection against AI scammers.  If someone leaves you a voicemail claiming to be a family member in an emergency, a quick reverse phone lookup through Spokeo can reveal the real owner of the number. This can then help you determine whether the request is legitimate, or if you’re dealing with a scammer.

The post How to stay safe from AI voice scams appeared first on KVIA.

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

These are the worst states for access to medical care

A view of Albuquerque, New Mexico’s skyline in the evening.

Equity in American healthcare is a work in progress. There are still some areas where it’s much easier and more convenient to access medical professionals and pharmacies. Improved access to care typically leads to better health outcomes, as well as an increased likelihood of people actually receiving preventative care and screenings.

Which states are falling short when it comes to accessible healthcare? Hers looked at four data sets to rank all 50 states from worst to best. 

• Shortage of primary care physicians: Access to primary care physicians is an important part of the healthcare system. Research from the National Center for Health Workforce Analysis shows that using primary care results in better treatment of chronic conditions and an increased life expectancy. 
• Percentage of population without health insurance coverage: Having health insurance coverage has a direct impact on health outcomes, including earlier prevention and screening services as well as better outcomes with diseases like cancer. 
• Pharmacy access: Research shows that a lack of access to pharmacies is a major factor in medication nonadherence. Another study revealed that pharmacy closures resulted in an immediate decline in adherence among older U.S. adults taking cardiovascular medications. 
• Access to medical specialists: Patients treated by specialists are shown to have better health outcomes compared to those solely treated by general practitioners. 

Key Findings

• New Mexico ranks as the worst state for healthcare access, particularly when it comes to specialists and pharmacists. But it’s not all bad news. Albuquerque has one of the highest telehealth participation rates in the country, according to a 2024 Hers study. (Albuquerque residents are the most likely of any metropolitan area in the U.S. to identify as “youthful.”) 
• New England and surrounding regions dominate the list of states with the best access to healthcare, with states like Vermont, Rhode Island, Connecticut, Massachusetts, and Pennsylvania on top. 
• States with smaller population densities showed up on the list of worst states for healthcare access, including Alaska, Montana, and New Mexico.
• The three worst states for access to healthcare (Colorado, Alaska, and Texas) also had some of the lowest concentrations of physician specialists. 

Hers

10 Best States for Healthcare Access

Infographic listing the 10 best and worst states for healthcare access in 2024.

1. Vermont
2. Rhode Island
3. Hawaii
4. Connecticut
5. Massachusetts
6. Pennsylvania
7. Minnesota
8. Ohio
9. Virginia, Utah (tied)

10 Worst States for Healthcare Access

1. New Mexico
2. Missouri
3. Mississippi
4. Montana
5. North Carolina, Oklahoma, Nevada (tied) 
8. Texas
9. Alaska
10. Colorado

Worst States for Healthcare Access: Trends and Insights

Here are the best and worst states in each of the four categories analyzed: primary care shortages, percentage of population without health insurance coverage, the number of pharmacies per 100,000 residents, and access to specialist care.

Which States Have the Lowest Met Need for Access to Primary Care Professionals?

Many states have a shortage of primary care physicians, which impacts how quickly people are able to get medical attention or schedule preventative screenings. Hers looked at the percentage of need met in terms of primary care physicians for each state.

Least Amount of Primary Care Need Met

• Delaware
• Alaska 
• Missouri

Greatest Amount of Primary Care Need Met

• Vermont
• New Hampshire
• Rhode Island

Which States Have the Least Amount of Health Insurance Coverage?

There is a major gap when it comes to health insurance coverage across the United States, which can hinder people from seeking medical care when they need it. 

States With the Lowest Percentage of Health Insurance Coverage

• Texas
• Oklahoma
• Georgia

States With the Highest Percentage of Health Insurance Coverage

• Massachusetts
• Hawaii
• Vermont

Which States Have the Lowest Concentration of Pharmacies?

Not only are people more likely to stay on top of medication when a pharmacy is nearby, they also use pharmacists as healthcare resources. One study found that patients visit community pharmacies twice as often as other providers, demonstrating the importance of access. 

States with the Lowest Number of Pharmacies Per 100,000 Residents

• Montana
• New Hampshire
• Illinois

States with the Highest Number of Pharmacies Per 100,000 Residents

• South Dakota
• Arizona
• Georgia

Which States Have the Fewest Medical Specialists?

Hers looked at the number of physician specialists per 100,000 residents in multiple disciplines, including psychiatry, surgery, anesthesiology, emergency medicine, radiology, cardiology, oncology, endocrinology, and other specializations. 

States with the Fewest Medical Specialists Per 100,000 Residents 

• New Mexico
• Missouri
• South Dakota

States with the Most Medical Specialists Per 100,000 Residents 

• Pennsylvania
• Florida
• Wyoming

These rankings also mirror access to other types of specialists. Missouri has one of the lowest concentrations of OB-GYNs in the country, while Florida has one of the highest. Similarly, Florida has one of the highest concentrations of dermatologists in the country.

Access to Healthcare: 50 States Ranked from Worst to Best

Based on the criteria outlined, plus the methodology explained below, here are all 50 states ranked from worst to best in terms of healthcare access across the U.S. 

1. New Mexico
2. Missouri
3. Mississippi
4. Montana
5. Nevada, North Carolina, and Oklahoma (tied) 
8. Texas
9. Alaska
10. Colorado
11. Illinois
12. North Dakota
13. South Carolina
14. South Dakota
15. Idaho and Washington (tied) 
17. Georgia
18. California
19. New Jersey
20. Wyoming and Oregon (tied)
22. Florida, Indiana, and Maryland (tied) 
25. Michigan
26. Arizona and Delaware (tied)
28. New Hampshire and New York (tied) 
30. Kentucky
31. Iowa, Tennessee, and Wisconsin (tied)
34. Kansas
35. Arkansas and Maine (tied) 
37. Louisiana
38. Alabama and Nebraska (tied)
40. West Virginia
41. Utah and Virginia (tied) 
43. Ohio
44. Minnesota
45. Pennsylvania
46. Massachusetts
47. Connecticut
48. Hawaii
49. Rhode Island
50. Vermont 

Note: Based on data collected in August 2024. Get the data.

Data & Methodology

Hers based its rankings on four data categories related to health access.

• Percentage of primary care need met: Access to primary care helps with both prevention and treatment of health issues. Hers looked at data from the U.S. Department of Health & Human Services’ quarterly summary of Designated Health Professional Shortage Areas Statistics for the third quarter of 2024.  
• Percentage of population without health insurance coverage: Hers used the U.S. Census Bureau‘s most recent data from 2022.
• Number of pharmacies per 100,000 residents: Hers compared the number of pharmacies in each state to the population, using data from the U.S. Census Bureau’s 2022 County Business Patterns. 
• Number of specialist physicians: Using data from KFF—Professionally Active Specialist Physicians by Field, (KFF, May 2024)—Hers compared the total number of specialists to each state’s population to find which areas had the most and least access. 

All categories were weighed equally. Each state was ranked individually in each category, then the average rank was used to determine final placement on the list. 

What to Do If You Live in an Area Without As Much Access to Healthcare 

Your health doesn’t have to take a backseat just because you live in an area with less access to medical care. Here are some strategies to make the most of health services no matter where you live to support healthy living. 

• Access telehealth services: Utilizing telehealth can significantly increase access to certain types of care. Many telehealth companies also provide affordable services for those who don’t have insurance, providing people more options for affordable care no matter where they live.
• Be proactive with preventative care: Instead of waiting to visit a provider when you’re sick, plan ahead no matter your age or current level of health. Scheduling regular screenings and checkups can lead to earlier detection and treatment of chronic diseases like diabetes, Alzheimer’s, and osteoarthritis.
• Use a mail prescription service: Mail-order pharmacies make it easier and more convenient to manage prescriptions, especially if you don’t have a pharmacy nearby. You may even save on copays, especially if you’re managing a chronic condition with ongoing medication. 

The post These are the worst states for access to medical care appeared first on KVIA.

BRENDAN SMIALOWSKI // Getty Images

Which congressional campaigns are drawing the most donations from wealthy donors this election?

U.S. Vice President Kamala Harris speaks during an event.

It takes a lot of money to win elections. The 2022 election cycle was the priciest nonpresidential election cycle in history, with spending reaching nearly $9 billion, according to an OpenSecrets analysis. Effective outreach and messaging requires ads, stickers, campaign staff, pens, and more—even for last-minute high-profile switch-ups such as the one the United States is currently facing.

With Biden’s decision to step aside, Kamala Harris’ campaign has received record-breaking contributions. Her team has raised more than $81 million in the 24 hours since Biden’s announcement, according to reporting from The Associated Press. As of August 29, 2024, the Harris and Trump presidential campaigns have netted over $750 million in donations, according to Federal Election Commission data.

But the presidential race is only part of the picture. The real races to watch are the congressional campaigns battling for control of both chambers in November, separated only by a few votes on either side. With margins razor thin, House Democrats only need to net five seats to regain control, while Senate Republicans require just two.

What kind of influence does all that money have? Some members of Congress have higher rates of small donors, those giving $200 or less, but PACs and wealthy donors constitute the greatest percentage of fundraising dollars. High-net-worth individuals accounted for 87% of total donors, and 90% of donations in House and Senate races, according to FEC data analyzed by Windfall.

Windfall took a look at the numbers to show which congressional campaigns are drawing the most donations from wealthy donors during this election cycle. Shown are donations from individuals worth at least $1 million and where they gave to House and Senate candidates, their affiliated committees, or unauthorized committees during the 2024 election cycle. According to the Survey of Consumer Finances, the median net worth of American households is $192,700, meaning the wealthy donors in this analysis are over five-times wealthier than the typical U.S. family.

Data is as of the first quarter of 2024, ending March 31.

Windfall

Deep pockets fuel campaigns across all states

Map showing wealthy political donors prominent across the U.S. Across all states, contributions from high-net-worth individuals to House and Senate races accounted for at least 40% of the total.

Fundraising is critical for candidates to reach their voters. Without the money from these efforts, campaign hopefuls can say goodbye to television ads, staff, and all the trappings that go with elections—and election wins. Most of the funds go toward media advertising to help spread a candidate’s message while also countering information from a candidate’s competitors. But there are also expenses just to keep grassroots efforts moving, such as payments for pollsters and printing yard signs and posters. These disbursements all add up to millions.

In Nevada, David Duffield, the billionaire entrepreneur behind enterprise software firms PeopleSoft and Workday, donated $2 million to help elect GOP Senate contender Sam Brown. Though not an established donor, FEC records show Duffield and his wife also donated more than $1 million to Trump’s campaign in 2020.

At more than $70 million this election cycle, Jeff Yass, an investor in ByteDance, is the second-highest donor to conservative causes and PACs, beating many on the top donors list by more than $11 million. ByteDance, which owns TikTok, has come under fire in the Biden administration because of security concerns. New York Magazine has speculated that Yass’ support for the Republicans may have influenced Trump’s sudden flip-flop on the TikTok ban.

At the top of the OpenSecrets list as of July 22 is Timothy Mellon, who made one of the largest political donations in history ($50 million) the day after Trump was convicted on 34 felony charges in Manhattan. This follows his donations to Make America Great Again Inc. and the American Values super PAC, which supported Robert F. Kennedy Jr.’s now-suspended campaign.

High-net-worth individuals like these might be driven to donate to shape policies that will help their finances, to impact social policies they care about, or simply because they enjoy the power and challenge. “Candidates start agreeing with you,” Robert Shapiro told U.S. News. A senior fellow at McDonough School of Business in Georgetown, Shapiro served as undersecretary of commerce under President Bill Clinton. “It’s psychic satisfaction for megalomaniacs.”

Wealthy individuals account for at least a third of total donations in every state, but in some, the share climbs to half. Donations by wealthy individuals accounted for 52% of total donations in Maryland and North Carolina, 51% in Hawaii, and 50% in Virginia.

Historically, winning candidates also spend the most. Exceptions include Republican Sen. Lindsey Graham’s 2020 win against Jaime Harrison in South Carolina, despite huge Democratic fundraising. In his campaign, Graham positioned the race as a choice between “capitalism versus socialism” and “law and order versus chaos.” Though Harrison had raised close to $109 million to Graham’s $75 million, it was the latter that ultimately won the votes.

As the Graham and Harrison bout shows, correlation isn’t causation. Studies show that partisan districting and national trends, rather than money alone, have the most influence on election outcomes. Instead of buying elections, donors give to candidates already favored to win.

Windfall

These key races attract millions in funding from the wealthy

Chart showing where wealthy backers drive House and Senate donations, focusing on the 10 districts with the highest percent of contributions from high-net-worth individuals.

Money may not guarantee a win, but it can help add fuel to critical races.

Among the seven congressional elections with the highest percentage of contributions from high-net-worth donors, affluent individuals accounted for at least half of all donations. Funds poured in from high-net-worth donors fueled downstream elections in Mid-Atlantic states, North Carolina, and Virginia, as well as in Florida, Tennessee, and New Jersey. While distinctive dynamics and demographic shifts define each of these well-funded elections, two possible horse races are worth highlighting. 

In North Carolina’s 13th district, Republican Brad Knott won the primary in a landslide victory and will face off against Democrat Frank Pierce. Redistricting in 2022 set the stage for a contentious election in the district, which has transformed since the last election cycle. In 2020, President Joe Biden was favored by voters by 1%, whereas today the district shows 17% support for Trump. The area has gone from a balanced and bipartisan district to a “MAGA fiefdom,” according to the Raleigh News & Observer. 

In Florida’s 23rd district, where wealthy individuals made just over half of all contributions, incumbent Democratic Congressman Jared Moskowitz will face off against Republican Joseph Kaufman in November. Despite redistricting in the Sunshine State that created mostly secure seats among incumbents, the House seat in the 13th district was ranked as “vulnerable” by the Tampa Bay Times. In a state that has gone from blue to purple over the last decade, affluent Democrats led the fundraising with 29% of all donations, as compared to 25% among Republicans. It’s worth noting that the district, which covers Boward and parts of Palm Beach County, has long been home to wealthy donors on both sides of the aisle. With Moskowitz winning his seat by just 5 points in 2022, it’s likely that wealthy donors will try to ensure the scales once again tip in his favor.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Alizah Salario and Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns.

This story originally appeared on Windfall and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Which congressional campaigns are drawing the most donations from wealthy donors this election? appeared first on KVIA.

Photo Illustration by E. Ciano with Shutterstock AI // Stacker

AI art is facing a copyright problem. Here’s what it means for creators.

Mickey Mouse wearing a copyright suit and cap holding a paintbrush in one hand and the scales of justice in another.

This summer, X (formerly Twitter) introduced its subscribers to Flux, a cutting-edge artificial intelligence image generator developed by Black Forest Labs. Soon after, the platform became saturated with images of celebrities and fictional characters created by AI.

Some entertainment and gaming industry titans were not happy. Disney and Nintendo, two companies with a track record for aggressively defending their intellectual property, place strict limits on using their characters and images. That left X users wondering how the companies would respond to the hundreds of millions of high-quality images of their favorite princesses and Italian plumbers firing guns or hobnobbing with controversial political figures.

Still, it’s not just major corporations that must contend with the nonconsensual use of their material. The recent explosion of AI has raised a whole host of copyright concerns for creators of all types, from influential global animation studios to individual artists with modest followings. The questions of who determines the ownership of AI-generated images and whether creators—whose work is used to train AI models—should share the profits of an image or text generated using their creative output loom large.

While media outlets, publishers, network studios, and other companies worldwide that own valuable intellectual property are gearing up to fight the tech companies in court, individual creators—illustrators, musicians, authors—who lack the corporate muscle to defend their interests may face a different battle.

Verbit examined news articles and legal research to see what the rise of AI means for creators.

Photo Illustration with Shutterstock AI // Stacker

Legal challenges loom for content created with AI

Cartoon style illustration of many gavels raining down from the sky.

As AI pushes the boundaries of what’s considered fair use, critical questions are being hashed out in court. One of the central tensions in several recent lawsuits is determining what constitutes fair use. When evaluating whether copyrighted material has been used without authorization, U.S. courts consider several factors, such as whether the new work is commercial or nonprofit, whether it is creative or factual, how transformative it is, and what economic impact it has on the copyright owner.

For example, sharing clips from news articles or movies for purposes of commentary or critique is considered fair use, as is publishing parodies of copyrighted works. In contrast, sharing an entire article or movie without authorization or any added commentary would not be fair use.

The New York Times, for example, is one of several news publishers suing OpenAI for copyright infringement. The company trained its chatbots on millions of articles from the Times, which now arguably compete with the newspaper. OpenAI, however, defends its models as transformative, and thus protected under fair use laws.

While the lawsuit is still pending, a similar argument succeeded in the 2015 Authors Guild lawsuit against Google Books. In that instance, the court ruled that Google Books, an online service providing searchable excerpts from millions of books, was transformative enough to fall under fair use, despite publisher objections that the service unfairly used their content.

Another prominent case involves a group of artists who sued several tech companies known for their text-to-image models for copyright infringement. The plaintiffs allege that the generative AI companies used their copyrighted work unauthorized to train their AI models, thereby enabling them to generate work in the styles of particular artists when prompted. The lawsuit also contends that Midjourney, another AI image generation company, once shared a list of 4,700 artist names, including some of the artists’ work, whose work their programs could imitate.

The yet-to-be-determined outcome of the case could have major implications for artists. If companies and consumers can use image generation tools to create an image almost instantly for fractions of a penny without the fear of legal action, they might ultimately decide that hiring humans to draw for them is simply too costly. This is doubly true if people can generate art that perfectly matches the styles of their chosen artists.

Photo Illustration with Shutterstock AI // Stacker

Looking to past fair use cases as precedent for the future

Cartoon illustration of Mickey Mouse hand shaking human hand.

One possible path forward for companies and major content producers wanting to protect their intellectual property rights would be for AI tools to sign licensing arrangements with them. OpenAI has already agreed to sizable deals with numerous publishers, including Condé Nast, Time, News Corp, Axel Springer, the Financial Times, the Associated Press, and others, agreeing to pay publishers millions of dollars for the rights to use their work over the next few years. Another pathway is being tested by Perplexity, an AI-driven search engine, which recently launched a revenue-sharing program.

This is not without precedent. In 2006, when YouTube was still in its infancy, record labels threatened legal action when music sharing boomed on the platform. Eventually, YouTube signed a licensing deal with producers, offering them a share of ad dollars in exchange for music sharing.

But while major news publishers and record producers might have the legal resources to sign deals with tech companies—and profit from their own work—individual artists, musicians, publishers, and other creators are often not as fortunate, making them easy targets for copyright issues.

Smaller YouTube creators often say they are falsely accused of copyright violations for sampling snippets of lyrics or song covers in educational videos. When a big music label issues a copyright claim, individual creators often have little recourse due to the narrow scope of fair use laws. They can either take down their video or pay the label a portion of their ad revenue—a crucial stream of revenue that keeps creators afloat.

Exactly how thorny copyright and fair use issues will play out as AI evolves is still unknown. However, as more people use generative AI to produce text, images, and videos, ambiguous cases will likely arise. It will be up to courts and legislators to define fair use, but that alone may not be enough to protect smaller creators who lack the resources to defend their work or secure deals with tech companies.

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close.

This story originally appeared on Verbit and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post AI art is facing a copyright problem. Here's what it means for creators. appeared first on KVIA.

Monkey Business Images // Shutterstock

Sunshine, adventure, and tax breaks: As baby boomers retire, here are the states where they can have it all

Group of smiling senior friends walking near water.

The explosive growth in America’s senior population reflects increased longevity and health.

Driven by baby boomers who began hitting senior status in 2011, Census Bureau data showed the 65 and over demographic grew by nearly 40% from 2010 to 2020. That’s compared to an overall population growth of just 7.4%, the most growth seniors have seen in a century. If the trend continues, Americans aged 65 and over will comprise 22% of the population by 2040.

The average life expectancy for a 65-year-old in 2022 was another 18.9 years, according to the National Council on Aging. That’s a lot of good years to enjoy, which presents one problem: Seniors need to figure out where to live to best enjoy those golden years.

For many seniors, factors like exercise and activity level impact lifestyle decisions, including where to live. Florida often comes to mind as a top option, with the cliche of snowbirds moving south to enjoy warmer weather. Although sweltering and sunny states like Arizona, Nevada, and Florida are top destinations for individuals to live, Idaho and Maine are becoming increasingly popular as active seniors retire in places known for their outdoor cultures.

Caring.com looked at Census data to find which states have had the biggest increase of residents aged 65 and over from 2010 to 2023. Read on to learn more about the top five states where seniors are most likely to move—the results may surprise you!

Caring.com

States with big outdoor cultures popular among seniors

A map showing the growth of residents 65 or older by state.

In the last decade and a half, there have been surprising trends among where older adults are choosing to call home. Census data shows a major migration West between 2010 and 2023, with seniors favoring states like Idaho, Nevada, Utah, and Colorado. There are also shifts to the Northeast and the South, with Georgia, South Carolina, and Vermont among the states attracting seniors.

Several factors are driving these regional trends. The lower living costs in rural areas compared to major metropolitan centers allow retirees to stretch their pensions and retirement savings. A temperate or warm climate can draw seniors to states like South Carolina, Georgia, and Florida, especially those tired of cold, harsh winters up north. Some older adults move to be near certain amenities and services or to be closer to family support, while others are looking for a new adventure in a new place.

Many seniors value a healthy lifestyle. According to a 2018 Harvard University study, there are five key lifestyle factors: healthy diet, consistent exercise, healthy weight, not smoking, and moderate alcohol consumption. Moving to states with a culture of active, outdoor-oriented lifestyles helps promote this healthy longevity.

Khairil Azhar Junos // Shutterstock

#5. Delaware

Aerial view of Lewes.

– Residents 65 or older: 219,318
– Growth since 2010: 69.6%

With beautiful views of the Atlantic Ocean from Rehoboth and Lewes beaches and its proximity to New York City, Philadelphia, and Washington D.C., Delaware is a great place for seniors to stay busy. The state offers many financial benefits for older adults living on fixed incomes: no state or local sales tax, no estate or inheritance tax, lower property taxes, and no Social Security tax. In July 2024, Delaware also launched the Geriatric Workforce Enhancement Program, a five-year, $5 million effort to improve the state’s senior health care system through research and professional training.

Jacob Boomsma // Shutterstock

#4. Nevada

Aerial view of Reno.

– Residents 65 or older: 555,709
– Growth since 2010: 71.3%

Las Vegas offers many perks for those living on a budget of less than $50,000 per year—including a lower cost of living than the U.S. average and no state income tax. There’s plenty to do beyond hitting the slots. Lake Mead and Red Rock Canyon offer a picturesque backdrop for outdoor activities like boating and hiking. Reno is another popular retirement option, with a similar blend of casinos and entertainment and proximity to outdoor adventures in Lake Tahoe and the nearby California border.

Studio 1One // Shutterstock

#3. Colorado

Denver cityscape.

– Residents 65 or older: 943,015
– Growth since 2010: 71.6%

Known for low rates of poverty and social isolation, as well as being home to some of the country’s best geriatric hospitals, Colorado offers a great environment to support both the mental and physical health of its older residents. A generous deduction on retirement income, along with low property taxes, helps outdoor enthusiasts save money to enjoy over 20 million acres of public recreation space and 33 ski resorts across the state. Whether you prefer the small-town charm of Fort Collins, the resort lifestyle in Aspen, or the bustling big-city energy of Denver, there’s something for everyone.

Charles Knowles // Shutterstock

#2. Idaho

Autumn trees and train depot in Boise.

– Residents 65 or older: 341,130
– Growth since 2010: 75.2%

Idaho is another state that may not be top-of-mind for retirement, but the capital of the Gem State shines with over 200 days of sunny weather each year. Property and sales taxes are relatively low, and there is no tax on Social Security benefits, making Idaho an affordable option for residents 65 and older. The state is also full of opportunities for active living, including waterfalls higher than Niagara at Shoshone Falls, skiing and snowboarding at Boise’s Bogus Basin Mountain Recreation Area, and a soothing resort at Lava Hot Springs.

Roman Tigal // Shutterstock

#1. Alaska

Aerial view of downtown Sitka at sunset.

– Residents 65 or older: 105,311
– Growth since 2010: 91.7%

Older adults willing to brave Alaska’s notoriously harsh winters are rewarded by some of nature’s greatest wonders: colossal glaciers; the tallest mountain in North America, Mount Denali, which stands over 20,000 feet; and a nearly 700-inch annual snowfall at the Alyeska Resort outside Anchorage. There are unique financial incentives that come with calling the Last Frontier home, including Alaska’s Permanent Fund Dividend, which offers an annual payment of up to $1,500 to full-time, permanent residents. The state also has a Senior Benefits Program, which provides monthly income-based assistance to seniors with low or moderate incomes.

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close.

This story originally appeared on Caring.com and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Sunshine, adventure, and tax breaks: As baby boomers retire, here are the states where they can have it all appeared first on KVIA.

Shutterstock // fizkes

How medical debt drives half a million people into bankruptcy each year

An older woman looking at the sheet of paper in her hand looking distressed and concerned.

The devastating financial toll of paying for urgent medical costs can take years or even a lifetime for some families to recover from. 

Set your browser to gofundme.com, and chances are the first donor cause you see will be someone asking for help to pay their medical bills. Around a third of campaigns on the crowdfunding platform are for medical bills. In some ways, this is unsurprising: Health care is extremely expensive in America. Data compiled by the Organization for Economic Cooperation and Development show that after adjusting for local costs, the United States spent around $12,500 per person on health care in 2022, double what Canada spent and around 50% more than what Germany spent.

These costs add up quickly. About 3 out of 5 personal bankruptcies in America are associated with medical debt. Doctors and Clinicians analyzed reports and survey data to determine how medical debt is contributing to America’s personal bankruptcy problem.

A 2019 study in the American Journal of Public Health found this proportion held, even after the Affordable Care Act drastically increased health insurance coverage. The study estimates that around 530,000 Americans file bankruptcy every year because of medical bills or illness-related work loss.

Research from the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau finds that as of 2021, 58% of debt in collections was related to medical bills. The next most common form of debt in collections, telecommunications bills, only made up 15% of the total.

Doctors and Clinicians

Just how widespread is medical debt?

A chart showing how much medical debt Americans have. Among those who have medical debt, most owe at least $1,000.

Figuring out just how many Americans have medical debt is tricky. No singular database exists on the topic, so researchers have to rely on survey data. One estimate from the Census Bureau found that roughly 15% of households had at least some medical debt in 2021. Using the same dataset, KFF estimates that around 8% of American adults had medical debt in 2021. Overall, people in the U.S. had a total of $220 billion in medical debts.

These estimates lean conservative, counting only medical bills and not other forms of debt such as credit card bills. In a separate analysis, which included credit card bills resulting from medical procedures, KFF estimates that around 40% of American adults have some form of medical debt, or 100 million people.

While it may be unclear exactly how big America’s medical debt problem is, surveys show consistent patterns when it comes to what groups of people are most likely to have unpaid medical bills. People with lower incomes, for instance, are more likely to report having medical debt. Around 11% of people who earn up to twice the federal poverty line have medical debt, compared with only 4% of people who make over six times the federal poverty line. Similarly, adults who lack health insurance for part of the year or the whole year are more likely to have unpaid medical bills.

It is also clear that people with high amounts of medical debt are more likely to have to make sacrifices to make their finances work. The KFF survey reports that among American adults with medical debt, 63% say they have had to cut spending on essentials such as food and clothing, while 48% say they have used up all or most of their savings. A study published in JAMA Psychiatry found that medical debt was associated with higher rates of depression and anxiety. People with medical debt were also more likely to delay mental health treatment, further exacerbating the problem.

Canva

Governments are working to relieve medical debt

An elderly Asian couple is looking worried while sitting on a couch. There is a laptop on a coffee table, and the woman is holding a white square device, showing it to the man next to her.

As part of the American Rescue Plan, the White House intends to pay off $7 billion in medical debt by the end of 2026. State and local governments have also implemented similar plans. In January, New York City announced that it would relieve $2 billion of unpaid medical bills in conjunction with nonprofit organization Undue Medical Debt (formerly RIP Medical Debt).

As part of a continuing effort to offer relief, the White House announced a proposal to prevent medical debt from showing up on credit reports. This would, in theory, help ensure that people with medical debt are able to access housing, secure car loans, or even find jobs.

Programs such as these should help people in theory. However, a recent National Bureau of Economic Research working paper found that relieving medical debt might not benefit people as much as policymakers might hope. A group of four researchers also partnered with Undue Medical Debt to track how well people did after being relieved of their medical debt. The nonprofit group paid off debt worth around $169 million for over 83,000 people from 2018 through 2020.

Unexpectedly, the authors found that debt relief did not affect people’s access to credit. People who benefited from the study did not go on to have better finances, nor did their mental health improve. One thing the paper did show was that people who had their medical debt paid off were actually slightly less likely to pay subsequent medical bills.

It is possible that just paying off medical bills is not enough to substantially improve the lives of people who could not afford them to begin with. In an interview with Stanford University, one of the study’s authors, Neale Mahoney, explained his research by describing medical debt as a symptom of people’s problems and not an underlying cause.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns.

This story originally appeared on Doctors and Clinicians and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post How medical debt drives half a million people into bankruptcy each year appeared first on KVIA.

Khairil Azhar Junos // Shutterstock

Where high-earning households are moving most

A U-haul trailer on the road near Apopka, FL in 2023.

When high earners move, they take their money with them. And because their budgets are much larger than most of the population, they can have an outsized effect on the local economy. Thus, states that attract high-earning households can gain an economic advantage over others. Many factors can drive high earners to move across state borders, including business opportunities, tax incentives and other conveniences.

With this in mind, SmartAsset examined the latest IRS data to find where households earning $200,000 annually or more are moving.

Key Findings

• Florida gained nearly 30,000 high-income households. Florida is the top state where high-income households are moving to with 29,771 net new returns. Texas ranks second for this metric, with a net addition of 8,260 high-earning households. 
• Money is moving to the Carolinas. North Carolina and South Carolina ranked third and fourth for most high-earning households moving in, with a net gain of 5,792 and 5,270 households, respectively. The average household income of high-earning households moving in is $456,000 for North Carolina and $501,000 for South Carolina. 
• California and New York lost the most high earners. California ranked last for the net number of high earners moving into the state, with a total loss of 24,670 high income households. While New York lost the second-most high-earning households, its figure is less than half of California’s loss, at -12,040 households. However, the high earners who did move into California and New York this time had a higher average adjusted gross income (AGI) than those who left.
• Fresh high-income transplants to Wyoming make nearly $1.6 million per year. The income of high-income households moving into Wyoming was just about triple that of those moving out ($535,000). The state ranked 21st overall with a net gain of 316 high-income households.

SmartAsset

10 States That Gained the Most High-Income Households

Table showing where high earning households are moving.

1. Florida

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 29,771
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 46,874
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 17,103
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $907,013
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $294,189

2. Texas

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 8,260
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 25,931
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 17,671
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $579,207
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $370,986

3. North Carolina

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 5,792
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 13,430
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 7,638
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $456,384
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $299,005

4. South Carolina

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 5,270
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 8,695
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 3,425
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $501,205
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $197,386

5. Arizona

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 4,365
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 11,041
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 6,676
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $561,112
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $328,474

6. Tennessee

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 4,320
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 8,786
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 4,466
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $586,256
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $268,316

7. Nevada

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 2,589
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 6,118
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 3,529
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $845,035
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $425,702

8. Idaho

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 2,113
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 3,540
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 1,427
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $494,497
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $190,606

9. Colorado

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 1,403
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 10,026
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 8,623
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $590,626
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $464,352

10. New Hampshire

• Net inflow of high-earning households: 1,104
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 2,981
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 1,877
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $619,679
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $387,142

10 States That Lost the Most High-Incomes Households

1. California

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -24,670
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 48,875
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 24,205
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $1,303,439
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $638,597

2. New York

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -12,040
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 29,869
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 17,829
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $1,194,676
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $719,123

3. Illinois

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -9,292
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 16,363
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 7,071
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $1,582,754
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $575,810

4. Massachusetts

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -4,392
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 11,810
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 7,418
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $990,970
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $701,116

5. New Jersey

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -3,863
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 15,661
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 11,798
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $892,971
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $533,027

6. Pennsylvania

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -2,417
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 10,950
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 8,533
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $734,519
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $515,809

7. Maryland

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -2,375
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 8,675
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 6,300
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $723,818
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $466,009

8. Virginia

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -2,375
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 12,691
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 10,316
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $588,569
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $436,370

9. Minnesota

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -1,784
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 4,929
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 3,145
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $950,019
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $450,349

10. Washington

• Net outflow of high-earning households: -1,579
• Outflow of high earners (number of returns): 13,393
• Inflow of high earners (number of returns): 11,814
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving out: $682,803
• Household income (AGI) for high earners moving in: $521,041

Data and Methodology

To determine where high-earning households are moving, SmartAsset reviewed the latest IRS data, which comes from the 2021-2022 tax year. High-earning households as those with adjusted gross incomes of $200,000 or more. The inflow of qualifying households in each state were compared to the outflows to determine net migration of high-earning households. The average AGI for high-earning households who moved during this tax year was also examined for each segment.

The post Where high-earning households are moving most appeared first on KVIA.

fizkes // Shutterstock

How does a reverse mortgage work in Canada?

An elderly couple happily engaged in a mortgage meeting with a banking specialist.

Did you know that over 25% of Canadians aged 55 and older are considering a reverse mortgage? With home values skyrocketing across the country, homeowners nearing or already in retirement are exploring the benefits of a reverse mortgage to tap into their home equity. But is this retirement planning tool worth it?

In this comprehensive guide, Money.ca examines how a reverse mortgage works in Canada and dives into the pros and cons to help you decide if a reverse mortgage is the right choice for your financial future.

What is a reverse mortgage?

A reverse mortgage is a home equity loan with deferred payments. You receive the funds tax-free, as the money is considered a loan rather than income. With a reverse mortgage, payment options, such as a lump sum or periodic installments, are flexible.

When you agree to a reverse mortgage, you are borrowing against the equity you have in your home. The amount you borrow and how interest is charged — commonly referred to as the schedule — is negotiable, just like any other type of loan. The difference with a reverse mortgage is that you won’t need to make monthly payments, as you would with a home equity line of credit (HELOC) or traditional mortgage. Instead repayment of a reverse mortgage is deferred — with the balance owed due when you sell your home or when you die.

The deferred repayments benefit retirees, as many live off fixed earnings, either from government or work pensions or from invested savings. Removing the burden of monthly payments in retirement helps retirees manage cash flow better, particularly when on a fixed income. The lender makes money because the interest charged on the loan accrues over time and is added to the final sum owed.

The magic of a reverse mortgage is that you only need to repay the loan once you sell the property, move out permanently or pass away. You can continue living in your home without mortgage payments but must maintain the property, including paying property taxes and insurance.

To take advantage of a reverse mortgage, you must meet certain requirements:

• Aged 55 or older
• The property with the reverse mortgage must be your primary residence
• You can only borrow up to 59% of your home’s value and this limit includes all outstanding loans

Is a reverse mortgage a good idea in Canada?

A reverse mortgage can be a great solution for retirees with not enough saved to pay for ongoing living costs. As a loan that does not require immediate repayments, the burden of paying off the debt does not impact you while you use the loan, and this leaves more cash available to pay for living expenses and other costs.

However, like all debt, a reverse mortgage can have its drawbacks. Because interest accumulates over time, there is the potential of getting into financial trouble. For that reason, Canadians are often required by the reverse mortgage lender to obtain independent legal advice before getting a reverse mortgage.

In general, a reverse mortgage is a good option if:

• You have unexpected costs like home repairs or medical bills
• You want to enjoy your retirement without the stress of moving
• You don’t want to burden your children with your financial needs
• You want to stay in your beloved home and community as you age
• You need to boost your monthly cash flow to cover living expenses

On the flip side, a reverse mortgage may not be the best choice if:

• You expect to move in the near future
• You plan to leave your home to your heirs without any debts
• You can comfortably meet your cash flow needs without tapping equity
• You are uncomfortable with increasing debts as you approach and sustain retirement

What is the average interest rate on a reverse mortgage?

Like all loans, interest rates on reverse mortgages can fluctuate. However, borrowers can expect to pay more for a reverse mortgage than a conventional mortgage. As of 2024, the average interest rate range for a reverse mortgage in Canada falls between 7% and 10%.

One reason reverse mortgages come with higher interest rates is that lenders will need to wait a longer period of time for the repayment of the loan. Other factors that impact the mortgage rate charged on a reverse mortgage include:

• Term length: A reverse mortgage generally carries a fixed rate throughout your term. Varying terms have different interest rates depending on current market conditions.
• Loan-to-value (LTV): Your interest rate increases as you borrow a larger percentage of your home’s value.

There are also additional fees to consider. Like most mortgages, a borrower will need to pay administrative and discharge fees. Most reverse mortgage lenders charge between $1,000 and $2,000 in setup fees.

Reverse mortgage Canada pros and cons

Pros:

• Deferred payment structure
• Access tax-free cash from your home equity
• You retain ownership and control of your home
• Maintain your current lifestyle and independence
• Approximately the same interest rate charged as a Home Equity Line of Credit, but monthly interest payments are not required

Cons:

• Higher interest rates than traditional mortgages
• Reduces the equity you can leave to your estate
• Your debts increase over time as interest accrues
• Setup fees, appraisal costs, and closing expenses
• Prepayment costs make it difficult to reduce your balance
• Depending on the lender, limited to certain cities and provinces

Where to get a reverse mortgage in Canada

Not all mortgage lenders offer reverse mortgages. Instead, you’ll need to work with a company that specializes in reverse mortgages or with a mortgage broker with knowledge and access to this type of home loan funding.

For instance, Homewise is an independent full-service mortgage broker that offers a turnkey approach to all types of home loans, including reverse mortgages. Talking to a Homewise mortgage broker is free and could help you determine the best options for your needs.

For those ready to start the reverse mortgage application process, consider the following options:

• Homewise — Offers insight and advice from independent mortgage brokers, along with reverse mortgage options
• HomeEquity Bank – Provides the CHIP reverse mortgage
• Equitable Bank – Offers reverse mortgages in select cities

This is not an exhaustive list. There are some provincially regulated institutions, and mortgage lenders offer reverse mortgages to Canadian homeowners, plus some banks now offer this home loan product.

Which banks in Canada offer reverse mortgages?

You can get a reverse mortgage from a handful of financial institutions in Canada. This includes key players such as HomeEquity Bank Equitable Bank and smaller options such as provincially regulated institutions and mortgage brokers.

How does a reverse mortgage work in Canada?

You’ll need to apply initially, as explained in the following section. Once approved, you can receive the money as a one-time lump sum or in regular installments. Any amount borrowed is added to your loan balance and accrues interest. It’s tax-free income since you’ll eventually need to repay the debt.

You can continue living in your home as usual. You’ll retain the title and responsibility for your home, meaning you’ll need to continue paying property taxes, home insurance and maintenance costs.

The loan becomes due when you move out, sell, default or pass away. At the end of the mortgage, you or your estate must repay the principal and interest owing. Any remaining equity belongs to you or your heirs.

How do I apply for a reverse mortgage in Canada?

You can apply for a reverse mortgage at your chosen financial institution. However, you must meet the following criteria to qualify:

• You must be a Canadian homeowner
• Be at least 55 or older
• The home must be your primary residence
• Agree to have your property appraised to determine its current market value
• Maintain your home in good condition and stay current on taxes and insurance
• Keep in mind that all individuals listed on the title for the property must meet these criteria.

Bottom line

For many Canadian homeowners, a reverse mortgage can be a strategic way to unlock the wealth in their property and improve their cash flow in retirement. With the recent rise in home prices, now could be an optimal time to leverage your home equity.

However, carefully considering both the benefits and costs involved is crucial. Discuss your options with a trusted financial professional who can help you assess whether a reverse mortgage aligns with your bigger-picture goals.

The post How does a reverse mortgage work in Canada? appeared first on KVIA.

Susan B Sheldon // Shutterstock

2024 sees more bills passed to make initiative processes easier

Official U.S. ballot return envelopes and “I voted” sticker for U.S. election.

During the 2024 legislative sessions, 326 pieces of legislation related to direct democracy—ballot initiatives, referendums and recall petitions—were proposed. As of August 5, Ballotpedia reports, 33 bills and resolutions were enacted, close to the annual average of 34 enacted bills between 2018 and 2023.

Of the 33 enacted pieces of legislation, 10 were designed to make the initiative process more difficult, including four constitutional amendments requiring voter approval (two in Arizona, one in Colorado and one in North Dakota). This is above the average of seven such bills enacted annually between 2018 and 2023.

This year also saw the highest number of enacted bills designed to make the initiative process less difficult, with five such pieces of legislation. In comparison, 2023 had four such enacted bills, higher than the 2018-2023 average of two.

Summary of 2024

In 2024, 326 bills related to initiative, referendum and recall were introduced in state legislatures and 33 of the bills were enacted (10.12%), including the four ballot measures to be decided on Nov. 5, 2024.

Proposed Legislation: In 2024, 326 bills and resolutions related to ballot initiatives, referendums and recall petitions were introduced in 40 states. This number marks an increase from the annual average of 302 proposals between 2018 and 2023. Lawmakers approved 45 (11.7%) of the 385 pieces of legislation introduced in 2023, which was the year with the highest number of proposed bills related to direct democracy laws.

• Of the 40 states with proposed legislation, 21 had an initiative or referendum process. There were five states that had an initiative or referendum process that did not see any legislative proposals related to changing the state’s process in 2024.
• 145 (44.7%) were introduced in the 23 states with Republican trifectas, 130 (39.9%) were introduced in the 17 states with Democratic trifectas, and 51 (15.6%) were introduced in the 10 states with divided governments.
• Missouri, which has an initiative and referendum process, saw the most introduced bills at 44; however, none of these bills were passed and enacted.

Enacted Legislation: 33 bills and resolutions were enacted in 2024 including the four ballot measures to be decided on Nov. 5, 2024. Utah had the most enacted pieces of legislation in 2024 with five bills enacted of the eight proposed.

Ballotpedia

Partisanship across parties

Bar chart showing enacted legislation related to initiative, referendum and recall by year and legislative vote margins.

Partisanship: 16 of the 33 enacted bills (48.5%) received bipartisan backing, 14 (42.4%) were passed with Republican majorities and three (9%) with Democratic majorities. In 2024, Republicans had trifectas in 13 (50.0%) of the 26 states that provide for statewide initiative and referendum. Democrats had trifectas in 10 (38.5%), and three (11.5%) states had divided governments.

• Of the 10 bills to make the ballot initiative process more difficult, six were passed with Republican majorities, three were passed with Democratic majorities and one was passed with bipartisan support.
• Of the five bills passed to make the process less difficult, three received bipartisan support, one was passed with a Republican majority and one was passed with a Democratic majority.
• In 2023, John Matsusaka, Director of the Initiative & Referendum Institute, published an analysis of state constitutional amendments that increased the cost of proposing or approving ballot initiatives. He found that from 1960 to 2022, “proposals to restrict initiative and referendum rights were common throughout the period.” His data indicates that there was a shift around 2000. Before 2000, about 50% of the amendments originated in Republican-controlled legislatures, while about 25% originated in Democratic-controlled legislatures and 25% originated in divided legislatures. After 2000, Republicans continued proposing constitutional amendments but the numbers fell for Democratic-controlled legislatures and divided legislatures.

Ballotpedia

Constitutional Amendments

Image of four constitutional amendments listed in a table.

Of the legislation enacted in 2024, four were constitutional amendments needing voter approval. From 2018 to 2023, there were 21 ballot measures related to the citizen-initiated or other ballot measure processes. Voters approved 11 (52.4%) and rejected 10 (47.6%) measures. Legislatures referred 17 (81.0%) of the measures, and the other four (19.0%) were citizen-initiated. The 2024 ballot measures would make the following constitutional changes:

• Arizona Proposition 134: Create a signature distribution requirement for citizen-initiated ballot measures based on state legislative districts;
• Arizona Proposition 136: Allow for challenges to a ballot initiative’s constitutionality within at least 100 days of the election date, rather than typically after the election;
• Colorado Senate Concurrent Resolution 2: Change deadlines for filing initiative and referendum petition signatures, thereby removing one week from the total circulation time, in order to allow one extra week for the secretary of state to certify ballot order and content and election officials’ deadline to transmit ballots;
• North Dakota Constitutional Measure 2: Establish a single-subject rule for initiatives; increase the signature requirement for constitutional initiatives; and require constitutional initiatives to be approved at two elections.

Ballotpedia provides comprehensive coverage of ballot measure legislation in 2024 here. Typically, more pieces of legislation are proposed and enacted during odd-numbered years, like 2023, than even-numbered years, like 2024. This is likely because many state legislative sessions are two years long, starting in the odd-numbered year, and more bills are introduced at the start of the two-year session.

The post 2024 sees more bills passed to make initiative processes easier appeared first on KVIA.

Liubomyr Tryhubyshyn // Shutterstock

Why the age-old hobby of coin collecting is attracting Gen Z devotees

Person looking at coin collection through a magnifying glass.

“I like coins for the aesthetics. I do not invest in cryptocurrency. I like something that you hold in your hand that other people have held in the past and bought stuff with or saved. I like the history,” Rex Goldbaum, then 23 years old, told The New York Times in 2022. In an era where new technology often replaces old interests, the centuries-old hobby of coin collecting has become popular with a surprisingly young generation. SD Bullion investigated the hobby’s recent rise among younger generations, including how it has remained culturally relevant even as cash use has dipped.

Collecting coins dates back to the Roman Empire, when emperor Caesar Augustus amassed them as gifts and bargaining chips in trade. The Renaissance later brought a resurgence of interest in antiquity, including “numismatics,” which Merriam-Webster defines as “the study or collection of coins, tokens, and paper money…”

Since then, coins have fascinated people around the globe, spawning organizations such as the American Numismatic Society, the Royal Canadian Numismatic Association, the Royal Numismatic Society, the Israel Numismatic Society, and the Royal Numismatic Society of New Zealand, to name a few.

According to GovMint, at least 3 in 5 Americans identified as collectors in 2022; of those collectors, 17% collected coins. Through the years, there have been many reasons why people get into the hobby, and the U.S Mint endorses the activity as a way to connect with others through a shared interest, preserve key figures and moments in history, celebrate the artwork, and, of course, as an investment. Curated collections like the Smithsonian’s 1.6 million-piece National Numismatic Collection—believed to be the world’s largest—also provide public education about the monetary value and broader cultural significance of currency.

Younger generations are keeping the tradition alive

It is rare to whip out cash in today’s increasingly digital society. In 2022, 2 out of 5 Americans reported using no cash during a typical week, according to a Pew Research Center survey. Despite this decline in cash use, coin collecting is a growing trend among younger generations. A survey by the U.K.’s Royal Mint found that Gen Z is most likely to start collecting; about 2 in 5 already have a collection and see it as an investment toward their future.

Millennials and Gen Z are driven by nostalgia and the desire to hold on to tangible objects in a world that becomes more digitally focused every day. In a video posted to his Treasure Town YouTube channel, Treasure Town Founder Christian Hartch revealed that part of the reason he came to numismatics was because of his family. “It’s a hobby I’ve enjoyed doing with my dad and grandfather for a long time, and it’s meant a lot to me,” said Hartch, who launched the channel at 17. As of August 2024, it boasts 182,000 subscribers.

Those who came of age during popular runs—the Olympic Commemorative Coins, released between 1983 and 2002, or the 50 State Quarters Program that ran from 1999 to 2008—find joy in hunting down these relics.

Because of their focus on tangible objects and emphasis on social activities, coin clubs may have also become spaces where young people can buttress themselves against the epidemic of loneliness and isolation, an issue the United States Surgeon General Vivek Murthy raised an alarm about in 2023.

“Doing something that is good for your mental well-being is very important,” coin collector Rowan Chetner told The Boston Globe. She characterized the Tufts Coin Club Collective, which only started as an official university club in 2023, as a “really fun and safe environment.”

Clubs across the U.S. have even begun fostering a love for coin collecting in younger children. Boy Scouts of America offer a Coin Collecting Merit Badge, Girls Scouts of the USA offer a Fun with Money Council Patch, and the American Numismatic Association’s Young Numismatists program has over 1,200 members between ages 5 and 18.

How technology is influencing the hobby

A recent tech infusion also makes this old-school hobby intriguing for younger generations. Many young collectors are finding their fascination with coins is turning a profit. Matthew Tavory started collecting at age 9 and began selling coins through Instagram in high school. Now, his hobby has become a full-time business selling to dealers at coin shows and on eBay, which helps him pay for college.

“People always ask me, what prevents coins from going the way of the stamps? And I tell them there are tons of young kids on Instagram. It’s easy to share, it’s easy to be very personal. And it’s just always expanding, young people getting into it,” Tavory told WLRN Public Media. Apps like LuckyCoin are also helping tech-savvy collectors buy and sell coins through eBay, as well as track their collections online.

Additionally, mints across the globe are drawing interest by creating new coins that glow in the dark, have unique colors, or can be scanned with a mobile phone to reveal more information. Non-fungible tokens, or NFTs, even make collecting entirely virtual, with unique digital coins that can be bought and traded just like real currency.

Which coins give the most bang for your buck?

Not all coins are created equal. Factors like rarity, condition, and demand can significantly impact their value. Unique coins, like commemorative editions and those with minting errors, can become quite valuable over time.

Those unfamiliar with the hobby might be surprised to learn that older coins can be worth hundreds of thousands, if not millions, of dollars. For example, the series of silver Nova Constellatio patterns, designed as proofs in 1783, is valued from $900,000 to nearly $2 million each. The most valuable of the “Jefferson cents”—copper coins produced from 1793 to 1796—are worth up to $576,000. But the most expensive coin ever sold? A 1933 Double Eagle, which brought $18.9 million at a 2021 auction.

Age alone does not determine value, though. Less than a century old, the 1944 Steel Wheat is arguably the most valuable penny in 2024, estimated at $408,000. The 2000-P Sacagawea Dollar—called the “Wounded Eagle” for the misprint that looks like a scratch through the bird’s body—is one of the most valuable coins still in circulation, selling for up to $7,200.

In 2023, the global coin collecting industry was valued at an astounding $18.1 billion, according to Transparency Market Research. If growth continues on this trajectory, it is expected to reach nearly $44 billion over the next decade. With this potential for continued growth, both in popularity and financial payoff, it appears young numismatists have selected a lucrative hobby for years to come.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close.

This story originally appeared on SD Bullion and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Why the age-old hobby of coin collecting is attracting Gen Z devotees appeared first on KVIA.

Photo illustration by Elizabeth Ciano // Stacker // Shutterstock

Location can impact health more than genetics. These initiatives are improving rural health care access.

A split screen digital illustration; the left side has a white silhouette of a stethoscope in the background with an overlay of rows of doctors walking toward the right-hand photo, which shows a hand holding a horseshoe magnet toward the doctors, with a rural windmill in background.

When it comes to health, our genes mean a lot: They carry our families’ history of diabetes or cancer, make us more susceptible to certain diseases, and impact our blood type. While genetics play a large part in health outcomes, they are only one piece of a complex puzzle. Based on recent examination, it’s clear that what public health experts call the social determinants of health are just as, if not more, influential in determining health outcomes.

Social determinants of health include economic stability, access to and quality of health care and education, social and community context, and environmental and geographic factors.

Living in a rural area intersects with many of these social determinants. There is frequently less economic stability, communities are more spread out, and drives to school are longer. Obstacles to health care access are far more prevalent than in more populated areas. Longer wait times, provider shortages, and fewer resources devoted to health care are several barriers to accessing medical professionals in rural communities. What’s more, fewer people in rural areas have health insurance than their urban and suburban counterparts.

Within rural areas, significant racial and ethnic disparities in health persist. Black and Indigenous Americans living in rural communities face much worse health outcomes than white rural residents due to inequities that impact wealth, access to education, and living and working conditions.

Only 10% of physicians practice in rural areas, though 20% of the U.S. population lives in rural areas, according to 2017 government data. In areas without enough physicians for the population—places designated Health Professional Shortage Areas—existing health issues often go undiagnosed and untreated for longer, emergency medical situations require long commutes, and there are fewer specialists to treat specific issues.

Doctor shortages have long been a part of rural life—medical students and doctors frequently go to school and practice in more heavily resourced urban or suburban areas. For rural patients, this lack of access to medical care can be distressing, frustrating, and psychologically damaging.

Medical schools and state and federal governments have taken steps to remedy these shortages. Hospital Care Compare dove into government data, public health research, and news coverage to investigate the reasons behind rural doctor shortages and how these shortages are being addressed.

Medical schools invest in students with the hopes they’ll put down rural roots

Various recruitment programs and incentives exist to attract physicians to rural areas where doctors are few and far between. Within about 40 medical schools and counting, organizations have created rural training tracks to attract medical students to practice rurally and prepare them adequately for this kind of work.

Part of these programs include outreach before students arrive at medical school—or even prior to them deciding to be doctors. A number of studies have shown that physicians are more likely to practice in rural areas if they come from a rural place, but students with rural upbringings are significantly underrepresented in medical school programs. These programs frequently recruit from rural community colleges and four-year schools to foster interest in medical school and attract more students from rural backgrounds to pursue medicine.

Once in these programs, students have more opportunities to train in rural communities than the average medical student. They complete their rotations and residencies in small communities and learn about the scope of rural practice, often broader than the scope for physicians in urban areas with more specialized practitioners.

In addition to rural-specific tracks and training programs, there are incentives for medical students pursuing rural practice, such as loan repayment programs for doctors. Federally, the National Health Service Corps has a loan repayment program for health care providers working in communities impacted by the opioid epidemic. Certain states also offer similar programs, promising loan repayment or forgiveness in exchange for a certain number of years of service within rural communities.

Another type of incentive aims to attract international medical students attending school in the U.S. to rural areas. These programs, known as J-1 visa waiver programs, allow students to live in the country on J-1 visas and practice immediately in the U.S., waiving the usual requirement that they return to their home country for at least two years—as long as they practice rurally in a designated Health Professional Shortage Area.

Although these programs are sometimes effective in getting physicians to rural areas, evidence is scant regarding the success rates of keeping them there.

According to a 2023 review of rural physician recruitment programs and incentives, little is known about the retention of doctors practicing in rural communities, and minimal resources and incentives remain available for doctors who stay in rural positions. Many physicians leave rural areas once they have completed incentives or service commitments, often leaving communities in a similar situation as they started.

Existing information about rural health care providers points to the importance of adequate preparation for rural practice and small-town living, as well as strong community bonds to keep physicians rooted in rural areas. Studies show that preparing doctors for a rural lifestyle, as well as giving them rural rotations, can improve retention rates. Integrating doctors into the communities they serve through nonwork-related engagement can also boost the likelihood of providers staying put in rural areas.

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on Hospital Care Compare and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Location can impact health more than genetics. These initiatives are improving rural health care access. appeared first on KVIA.

LightField Studios // Shutterstock

5 tips for sustainable fashion that won’t hurt the environment or your pocketbook

Woman sorting through clothing.

We’ve all seen them: stores and websites that offer a colorful, seemingly endless rotation of every style of clothes at impossibly low prices. Brands like Forever 21, H&M, Uniqlo, and Zara are at the forefront of the rise of “fast fashion,” mass-producing clothes at lightning speed to provide consumers with a constant flow of cheap options.

But fast fashion is wreaking havoc on the environment, causing ecological harm at every stage, from production and shipping to disposal. The UN Alliance for Sustainable Fashion estimates that fast fashion accounts for up to 8% of global carbon dioxide emissions. That’s more than all emissions from international flights and ocean transport combined. Clothing and textile waste—which fast fashion produces en masse—is the fastest-growing category of waste in the country. Globally, more than $100 billion of clothing material is wasted annually, according to a Circular Fibres Initiative analysis.

Along with its environmental harm, fast fashion is a source of widespread human rights abuses. The quick turnaround and high production quantity are only possible due to low pay, long hours, and unhealthy labor conditions for workers, often those in majority world countries. The average worker employed by a fast fashion producer receives only half a living wage, and those numbers drop even lower for women and children. Shein suppliers alone have been reported to mandate 18-hour days with no breaks and pay workers a meager 3 cents per item produced.

Ultimately, the cost of fast fashion is very high, even though the price on the tag is tantalizingly low.

The good news? There’s a way to be fashionable without feeding this harmful system. And you don’t have to overhaul your whole closet to get started either.

The RealReal put together five tips for sustainable fashion that will lower your impact on the environment—and your wallet. From how you buy clothes to how you take care of them and even the thought you put into designing your wardrobe, there are plenty of small lifestyle changes you can make while still having fun with your style.

Iryna Imago // Shutterstock

Try to avoid buying from fast fashion outlets

Woman shopping in trendy fashion store.

Although their low prices can be tempting, avoiding fast fashion from brands like Shein, Zara, Temu, and Fashion Nova can benefit your budget and the environment. These brands produce hundreds of new styles per week (with Shein topping 1,000), generating massive waste.

Many of these garments are made from polyester, which generates triple the amount of greenhouse gasses to produce compared to cotton and can take up to 200 years to decompose. And that’s not even taking into account shipping: many fast fashion retailers are online-only and depend on worldwide shipping to reach consumers, resulting in harmful greenhouse gas emissions; Shein and Temu send around a combined 600,000 packages to the U.S. daily, according to a June 2023 U.S. Congress report. Once a fast fashion item reaches its destination, its lifecycle is nearly over—on average, it will last no more than 10 wearings.

In short, even though fast fashion might be cheaper to purchase, over the long run, your wallet will thank you for investing in more durable pieces. At the same time, the best way to practice sustainable fashion is to wear the clothes you have, so don’t rush to throw out any fast fashion pieces you may already own. Instead, take good care of them so they’ll last as long as possible.

Dmitry Naumov // Shutterstock

Explore the booming secondhand clothing market

Person looking at jackets in a second hand store.

Shopping secondhand is a great way to give used garments another life, and it’s often much more affordable than buying new. On average, consumers who shop at thrift stores can save around $150 a month, or $1,760 a year. Thrift stores aren’t your only option either. Vintage stores sell unique pieces from decades past, and there is a growing marketplace of online clothing rental services that allow shoppers to rent clothes at a fraction of their purchasing price, wear them, and then return them to be passed onto a new wearer.

When buying a piece of clothing for good, try the 30 Wears Challenge by pausing to consider whether you’d wear the item at least 30 times before you hand over your credit card. Of course, it’s even better to see yourself wearing it forever!

This isn’t to say that you need to exclusively shop secondhand or overhaul your entire wardrobe; if every shopper bought just one used piece of clothing instead of a new one this year, a cut in the production of new clothing could lower CO2 emissions by more than 2 billion pounds and save 23 billion gallons of water.

New Africa // Shutterstock

Prolong your clothes’ lifecycle

Person doing laundry reading clothing label care symbols.

Taking proper care of your clothes extends their lives, meaning you’ll spend less money—and expend less environmental waste—replacing them. Many habits require little effort but can make all the difference in how long your wardrobe lasts, like washing denim inside out, using a steamer instead of an iron, or investing in a fabric shaver for knitted clothes.

The care instructions inside your clothes provide valuable information for proper care, including the best temperatures and cycles for machine washing different fabrics or whether to take the time to wash them by hand. Drying your clothes correctly is also important, as fabric breakdown accounts for 29% of clothes that are thrown away.

vi mart // Shutterstock

When clothes no longer fit, don’t discard them—alter them

Person making alterations to clothes, top view.

We all fluctuate in size throughout our adult lives—but if we threw out our clothes and bought a new wardrobe every time this happened, we’d be harming both our wallets and the environment. Instead, learning some basic sewing skills could save you time and considerable money, while reducing waste.

Another option is to take your clothing to a local tailor. While alterations may seem pricey, they can save you money over the long term and provide a dependable fix to ensure you don’t have to part with your favorite sweater. Increasingly, brands (including Patagonia, MUD Jeans, and Chaco) offer repairs to the items they sell, making them last longer. Even extending your clothes’ life span by just one or two years can decrease your fashion carbon footprint by 24%.

New Africa // Shutterstock

Condense and simplify your wardrobe

Woman choosing clothes from an edited wardrobe.

The average person wears only a fraction of their closet regularly—as little as 10%-20% by some estimates. Put simply, many people own much more clothing than they actually need. Taking a thoughtful look at your wardrobe and narrowing it down to some key, tried-and-true pieces can keep you from splurging on new clothes that you won’t actually wear. For instance, many of us swap out our clothes depending on the season, but investing in pieces you can layer year-round can reduce or eliminate this need.

A capsule wardrobe can be a great approach. The term refers to a minimalist closet filled with a small number of versatile pieces (often around 30) that can be easily mixed and matched to create a variety of outfits. Experts advise taking time to go through your wardrobe and ask yourself if what you own is comfortable, fits your personal style, and pairs well with the rest of your clothing.

Story editing by Mia Nakaji Monnier. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close.

This story originally appeared on The RealReal and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post 5 tips for sustainable fashion that won't hurt the environment or your pocketbook appeared first on KVIA.

PeopleImages.com – Yuri A // Shutterstock

Top 50 healthcare careers for 2024-2025

A medical professional looking through drugs and their descriptions in a laboratory.

The healthcare sector is booming due to a growing population that will require increasing care with age.

Baby Boomers—those born between 1946 and 1964—are retiring at the rate of thousands per day. The Pew Research Center reports that Millennials—roughly ages 25 to 40—overtake Baby Boomers as America’s largest generation. This means that a large percentage of the American workforce carries the burden of the economy during their prime childbearing years.

With large segments of the population entering their senior years and others with growing families, health professionals will be in demand to meet these increasing needs.

Fortunately, promising healthcare careers abound in 2024-2025.

Methodology

Here’s how Medical Technology Schools broke down the top 50 health careers for 2024-2025:

Career growth

Career growth (as predicted by the Occupational Outlook Handbook (OOH) from the Bureau of Labor Statistics) was considered since having a positive employment outlook is essential to making a career an attractive path. These measurements included both the projected growth percentage as well as growth in the absolute number of jobs available.

Salary

Salary is also a factor, with higher-paying jobs being boosted even if their demand outlook was not as strong.

Flexibility and return on investment

Flexibility and return on investment also influenced the selection of careers, although to a lesser degree than projected career growth or salary. Physical therapy, for instance, affords practitioners the flexibility to determine and adjust their schedules.

Unless otherwise specified, all BLS career growth figures are projected increases in jobs in the US between 2022 and 2032, and all salary figures are from May 2023—the most recent data available as of August 2024.

Top careers in healthcare for 2024-2025

1. Physical Therapist – Physical therapy tops this health career list because it is a lucrative position with expected growth in the coming years. It also offers a relatively flexible and comfortable lifestyle. As of May 2023, the median annual wage for physical therapists was $99,710, and demand for these health professionals is expected to grow by 15 percent in the decade preceding 2032. Unlike other health professionals, physical therapists can often make their hours, choose their clients and be more likely to be self-employed.
    
2. Dental Hygienist – Between 2022 and 2032, more than 16,300 new dental hygienist jobs are expected to be available. That represents an impressive growth rate of 7 percent, which is faster than the average for all occupations (3 percent). Dental hygienists earn a median annual wage of $87,530 and typically hold at least an associate degree.
    
3. Nurse Practitioner – In many states, nurse practitioners are licensed to do much of what physicians can do. As the demand for healthcare services increases over the next decade, the demand for nurse practitioners is expected to increase by 45 percent (2022 to 2032). With a median salary of $126,260, this career is even more lucrative than physician assistants (or associates), particularly for in-demand specializations like adult care, gerontology, neonatal, pediatric and more.
    
4. Physician Assistant – Not to be confused with medical assistants, physician assistants are highly trained health workers with advanced degrees who work closely with medical doctors to diagnose and treat illness. In May 2023, the median salary for a physician assistant in the US was $130,020, helping to make this challenging career one of the most lucrative in healthcare. The demand for physician assistants is expected to increase by 27 percent between 2022 and 2032.
    
5. Physician – Becoming a physician carries great prestige and requires a significant investment of time and financial resources. But the tangible rewards in this field are also pronounced. The median salary for physicians and surgeons in May 2023 was equal to or greater than $236,000 per year. It should be no surprise that this is among the top healthcare careers available. Most physicians require 11 to 15 years of postsecondary schooling and training. They also usually incur substantial student loan debts.
    
6. Registered Nurse – In May 2022, there were over three million registered nurse jobs in the US and that number was expected to swell by 6 percent through the year 2032. Nurses enjoy a median salary of $86,070 (BLS May 2023) for their work providing and coordinating care and educating and supporting patients in their wellness journeys.
    
7. Occupational Therapist – The BLS has noted that the demand for occupational therapists is expected to grow much faster than the average (3 percent) at 12 percent by the year 2032. This growth, coupled with a relatively high median salary of $96,370 (BLS May 2023) per year, makes this a highly desirable career pursuit. OTs typically have at least a master’s degree.
    
8. Home Health Aide – Not every health worker spends their days in a hospital or clinic. Home health aides have the opportunity to assist patients in the comfort of the patient’s homes and, while doing so, enjoy a wide-open employment market with a 22 percent projected growth rate. Although the median salary is just $33,530 ($16.12 hourly), with 804,600 jobs being added by 2032, there are expected to be many opportunities in this field. Highly accessible, the educational requirement for home health aides is a high school diploma or an equivalency exam.
    
9. Diagnostic Medical Sonographer – Diagnostic medical sonographers work closely with physicians but do not require nearly as much training, which means a faster track to employment. Demand for diagnostic medical sonographers is expected to grow by 14 percent through 2032, translating into ample opportunities for graduating students. Sonographers generally have at least an associate’s degree and certification. They earn a median annual salary of $84,470 (BLS May 2023) and work in hospitals, laboratories or medical office settings.
    
10. Licensed Practical or Licensed Vocational Nurse – It’s no secret that the demand for all types of nurses is high, with some even terming the shortage a crisis. In response, the demand for licensed practical and vocational nurses is expected to climb, with nearly 34,900 (5 percent) more jobs being added between 2022 and 2032. Working under the supervision of RNs and physicians, LPNs and LVNs provide nursing care to individuals of all ages. In May 2023, the median salary for licensed practical or licensed vocational nurses in the US was $59,730.
     
11. Physical Therapist Assistant – With the high demand and salary for PTs, it should come as no surprise that physical therapist assistants are not far behind. The median salary for this career comes in at $64,080 (BLS May 2023) and demand is expected to grow by a whopping 26 percent through 2032. Similar to LPNs, PTAs work under the guidance of a physical therapist to assist patients with mobility, physical wellness and pain management.
     
12. Dental Assistant – The field of dentistry is growing and dental assistants are in demand. These professionals earn a median annual salary of $46,540  (BLS May 2023) and have 7 percent expected job growth between 2022 and 2032. With no graduate degree requirements, this job is a relatively quick way to start working in dentistry.
     
13. Medical Assistant – A medical assistant can work anywhere from a physician’s office to an emergency room, giving this career a lot of variety. More importantly, 105,900 jobs are expected to be added to this profession by 2032, meaning that there will be plenty of open positions in the next decade. These professionals earn a median annual salary of $42,000  (BLS May 2023).
     
14. Medical or Clinical Laboratory Technician – As medical technology expands, the need for trained professionals to maintain and interpret that technology grows. That is why the demand for medical and clinical laboratory technicians is expected to increase by nearly 5 percent in the decade preceding 2032. Professionals in this field can expect to earn up to $60,780 as a median annual salary (BLS May 2023), and with 16,800 jobs to be added between 2022 and 2033, you can expect the positions to be around after students complete their postsecondary nondegree award.
     
15. Pharmacist – While the need for pharmacists is expected to increase just 3 percent between 2022 and 2032, the salary is much higher than most. The median income for this health career is $136,030  (BLS May 2023), making it an attractive opportunity for students willing to pursue an advanced degree. Pharmacists are responsible for filling and dispensing medications and counseling patients on their use.
     
16. Surgeon – A career in surgery is certainly not one to take on lightly. It requires years of schooling as well as specialized training. However, surgeons can expect to earn a median wage equal to or greater than $239,200 per year, according to the Bureau of Labor Statistics. The mean (average) annual wages for surgeons in May 2023 was $343,990.
     
17. Radiologic Technologist – Diagnostic imaging techniques such as X-rays have been around for many years, and they’re still one of the most effective ways to diagnose tumors and cancers. Radiologic technologists are expected to be in high demand, with 12,200 (5 percent increase) expected positions added through 2032. Radiographers also earn a decent living at $73,410 yearly (median annual wage) with an associate’s degree.
     
18. Surgical Technologist – While it’s known that surgeons are well compensated, their assistants, who require much less school and fewer training hours, are also in demand. The demand for surgical technologists, also known as operating room technicians, is expected to grow by at least 5 percent through the year 2032. Their median pay was $60,610 in May 2023.
     
19. Dentist – With more schooling required and less job growth expected (4 percent between 2022 to 2032), dentistry is a bit lower ranked than a dental hygienist or dental assistant. However, on average, dentists make an annual median salary of $170,910 (BLS May 2023) and may own their dental practices, which makes it relatively flexible for scheduling.
     
20. Emergency Medical Technician/Paramedic – The life of an emergency medical technician (EMT) or paramedic is certainly never dull. These life-saving health professionals are also in high demand with more than 14,600 (5 percent increase) jobs expected to be added through the year 2032. With training required beyond high school (non-degree), EMT and paramedic services may be a good career path for individuals contemplating a career in the medical field or who thrive on adrenaline and helping others in crisis. Their median annual wage for EMTs was $38,930 in May 2023 and $53,180  for paramedics.
     
21. Nursing Assistant – In another instance of nursing skills being in high demand, more than 56,500 new nursing assistant jobs are expected to be added to the field by 2032. Nursing assistants also have a range of work environments available to them, including nursing homes, hospitals and private physicians’ offices. Employment is projected to grow 4 percent from 2022 to 2032. Their median annual wage was $38,200 in May 2023.
     
22. Family Physician or General Practitioner – A physician does not have to be highly specialized to be in demand with an enviable salary. Family physicians and general practitioners, many of whom are self-employed, can earn a median average salary of $224,640 per year. Their mean (average) annual wage was $240,790 in May 2023. Family medicine physicians have an expected growth of 4 percent through 2032.
     
23. Speech-language Pathologist – Also known as speech therapists, speech-language pathologists are certainly in demand with an expected growth rate of 19 percent through 2032. While a master’s degree is required to start this career, speech-language pathologists earn a median annual salary of $89,290 per year.
     
24. Occupational Therapy Assistant – With an expected growth of 24 percent through 2032, occupational therapy assistants are one of the most in-demand careers in healthcare. Occupational therapy assistants earn a median annual salary of $67,010 (BLS May 2023). With a minimum requirement of an associate’s degree, this can be an attractive career for anyone seeking relatively quick employment in a helping profession.
     
25. Anesthesiologist – This physician specialty includes highly trained physicians earning a whopping mean annual salary of $339,470 (BLS May 2023). While the overall demand is less than in some other healthcare careers, the high salary was important when ranking this job. The demand for these professionals is expected to grow at least 3 percent through 2032.
     
26. Medical Records Specialist – Not all health professions involve much patient contact. Medical records specialists work to organize and manage health information data, usually far from patients. The demand for these professionals is expected to grow at least 8 percent through 2032, with 16,500 new jobs being added during that period. The median annual wage for medical record specialists in May 2023 was $48,780.
     
27. Nurse Anesthetist – Just as anesthesiologists are in high demand and command high salaries, nurse anesthetists are also needed nationwide. They administer anesthesia and provide care before, during and after therapeutic, surgical, obstetrical and diagnostic procedures. Nurse anesthetists garner a median salary of $212,650 (BLS May 2023) and require a master’s degree. Employment is projected to grow 9 percent from 2022 to 2032.
     
28. Cardiovascular Technologist or Technician – Another career specializing in medical imaging is the cardiovascular technologist and technician. These professionals typically work full-time in hospitals, maintaining and running cardiovascular monitoring equipment. The demand for cardiovascular technologists and technicians is expected to grow by 4 percent through 2032. These technicians can expect to make a median annual salary of $66,170 (BLS May 2023).
     
29. Phlebotomist – With an expected growth rate of 8 percent (10,800 new jobs added) between 2022 and 2032 and a median annual salary of $41,810 (BLS May 2023), phlebotomists are situated firmly in the middle section of this list. This medical personnel withdraws blood or plasma from patients for various purposes.
     
30. Pharmacy Technician – A pharmacy technician is an assistant to a pharmacist with much less training. As the need for prescription medications expands, so too does the demand for this particular career. About 25,900 jobs (a 6 percent increase) for pharmacy technicians are expected to be added by 2032. Professionals in this field can expect to make a median annual salary of $40,300.
     
31. Athletic Trainer – Athletic trainers prevent, diagnose and treat bone and muscle illnesses and injuries. They work with people of all ages, from young children to professional athletes. They work under physicians and other healthcare providers. About 4,800 jobs (a 14 percent increase) for athletic trainers will be added by 2032. Professionals in this field can expect to make a median annual salary of $57,930.
     
32. Massage Therapist – Individuals interested in pursuing a health career who want to work for themselves may consider a career in massage therapy, as nearly half of all massage therapists are self-employed. The demand for massage therapists is also high with an expected increase of 18 percent by 2032. The BLS states that massage therapists only require a postsecondary nondegree award and make a median salary of $55,310.
     
33. Optometrist – Another career requiring a doctoral degree, optometrists can expect to earn about $131,860 (median wage) annually. The demand for these specialists is also decent, with more than 3,800 jobs expected to be added by 2032. In addition to performing eye exams, optometrists diagnose and treat problems with vision, eye diseases, injuries and disorders.
     
34. Respiratory Therapist – These medical professionals help patients to treat the symptoms of chronic respiratory diseases, such as asthma or emphysema. To pursue this career, students must earn at least an associate’s degree and can look forward to a median salary of $77,960 per year (BLS May 2023). Employment is projected to grow 13 percent from 2022 to 2032. The demand for these specialists is also high, with more than 16,700 jobs expected to be added by 2032.
     
35. Veterinary Technologist or Technician – Of course, not all health careers involve caring for humans. Veterinary technologists care for animal patients of all shapes and sizes and are rewarded for those efforts with a median salary of $43,740. The demand for veterinary technologists and technicians is expected to grow by almost 21 percent by 2032. About 25,200 jobs for Veterinary Technologists or Technicians are expected to be added by 2032.
     
36. Physical Therapist Aide – A physical therapist aide does work that is slightly different from that of a physical therapist assistant, but the position is still in demand. Physical therapist aides assist physical therapists and physicians with administrative, clinical or scheduling needs. By 2032, a 3 percent increase in demand for this particular career is expected, which means more than 1,300 new jobs around the country. Professionals in this field can expect to make a median annual salary of $33,520 (BLS May 2023).
     
37. Chiropractor – Chiropractors are professionals performing manual therapy to help patients with neck and back pain. They care for patients with health problems in the neuromusculoskeletal system, which includes bones, nerves, muscles, tendons and ligaments. These professionals have a job that is expected to see a more than 9 percent increase in demand by 2032. The median annual wage was $76,530 in May 2023.
     
38. Genetic Counselor – These professionals are involved in assessing family or individual risk for various inherited conditions, such as birth defects or genetic disorders. Genetic counselors provide support and information to other healthcare providers, families and individuals concerned. These professionals earn a median salary of $95,770 per year and there is expected to be a 16 percent growth nationally in opportunities for this medical profession between 2022 and 2032.
     
39. Dietitian/Nutritionist – Working with patients to help them live healthier lives can be extremely rewarding, as any dietitian or nutritionist will know. These professionals have a job expecting to see a more than 7 percent increase in demand by 2032. Dieticians and nutritionists have various backgrounds, but degrees in health or science will help prepare those interested in this field. The median annual wage was $69,680 in May 2023.
     
40. Optician – An optician assists people in finding and fitting eyeglasses and contacts by following the prescriptions provided by ophthalmologists and optometrists. More than 2,000 optician jobs (a 3 percent increase) will be added by 2032. The median annual wage for this occupation was $44,170 in May 2023.
     
41. Internist, General – A general internist, also known as a doctor of internal medicine, can earn about $245,450 (mean wage) per year with the proper training. The primary role of internal medicine doctors is to provide non-surgical treatment of injuries and diseases of the internal organs of their adult patients. The median wage for general internal medicine physicians was $223,310 in May 2023.
     
42. Audiologist – Although audiologists do need an advanced degree, they do not require a medical degree. They usually hold master’s degrees. These hearing and balance specialists earn a median salary of $87,740 per year and there is expected to be a 11 percent growth nationally in opportunities for these medical professionals between 2022 and 2032.
     
43. Veterinarian – Though veterinarians do not have quite the job outlook of their related technicians, they can expect a higher-than-average salary. The median annual salary is $119,100 and 20 percent growth is expected through 2032. More than 17,700 jobs are expected to be added by 2032.
     
44. MRI Technologist – MRI technologists get to work alongside physicians with some of the most sophisticated medical equipment available to diagnose and treat patients. With just an associate’s degree, new MRI techs can enter this well-paid field that is expected to grow by 8 percent by the year 2032. MRI technologists make a median annual salary of $83,740, according to the BLS (May 2023).
     
45. Ophthalmic Laboratory Technician – Another field experiencing a boom in growth is that of Ophthalmic laboratory technicians. Specialists in this career construct, fit and repair eyeglasses. Ophthalmic technicians also counsel patients on treatments, schedule appointments and assist eye doctors with in-office procedures. Their median annual wage was $37,720 in May 2023.
     
46. Radiation Therapist – Working with cancer patients and individuals with other serious illnesses is not easy, but it can be very rewarding. For their hard work, radiation therapists earn a median salary of $98,300 per year, and 400 radiation therapy jobs (a 2 percent increase) are expected to be added nationally by 2032. The job requires a relatively short period of education, only as much as is necessary to obtain an associate’s degree. This is typically for two years.
     
47. Pediatrician – Physicians who specialize in working with children can be among the most compassionate individuals. They can work in hospitals, clinics, emergency rooms and various specialty centers. The median wage for a pediatrician was $198,690 in May 2023.
     
48. Nuclear Medicine Technologist – Nuclear medicine technologists are among the high-paying healthcare careers that do not require an advanced degree, although an associate’s degree and 1,300 practice hours are required. The median pay for these skilled professionals is $92,500 per year, which is equal to $44.47 per hour (May 2023).
     
49. Orthotist or Prosthetist – Orthotists, prosthetists or O&P professionals design devices that support patients with medical needs, including prosthetics. The demand for these skills is expected to increase by 15 percent, much faster than average, through 2032. O&P professionals always have master’s degrees and must have completed an internship or residency before employment in the field. The median annual wage was $78,100 in May 2023.
     
50. Psychiatrist – A psychiatrist is a specially trained physician who deals with mental and other psychological illnesses. These physicians can command a mean salary of $256,930, depending on location, expertise and type of practice. Psychiatrists hold doctorates in their fields and usually operate their practices, where they maintain professional relationships with many different clients. There is expected to be a 7 percent growth nationally in opportunities for these professionals between 2022 and 2032.

The post Top 50 healthcare careers for 2024-2025 appeared first on KVIA.

Canva

Kids are going back to school during one of the hottest years on record. Here’s how heat affects learning.

A row of school busses lined up under a blazing sun.

In July, global temperatures continued to climb to their highest levels on record, marking 14 consecutive months of record-high temperatures, according to a National Centers for Environmental Information report.

As temperatures climb, so do concerns over the effect of these hot weather days on learning. “Kids are coming to school and not even having their basic needs of comfort met; and if they don’t have their needs met, they can’t progress and learn and do all of those things we want them to do at school,” Madison McCulloch, a Columbus, Ohio, elementary school teacher, told American Progress.

McCulloch was one of the Columbus teachers who went on strike in 2022, in part to ensure her students would not be learning in unsafe environments with the increasing heat. After three days of picketing, the union came to an agreement, guaranteeing climate-controlled learning areas for the schools by the 2025-26 school year. Though Ohio’s case was a triumph for learning, many others may not be so fortunate despite the clear evidence that extreme heat and education do not mix.

With schools across the United States returning to the classroom this fall, studies have shown that heat can have a massive impact on students’ ability to learn. Study.com examined academic research to see how heat affects learning outcomes.

Canva

The heat is on education

A classroom of students seen from behind listening to their teacher, with some raising their hands.

A study published in the journal Nature Human Behavior in October 2020, combining standardized achievement data for 58 countries and 12,000 United States school districts, found learning is constrained by heat exposure, both internationally and within the U.S.

The study showed that climate variations may contribute to differences in educational achievement by socioeconomic status. Students who attended school during hotter periods scored worse on exams than their peers in the same country at school during cooler periods between 2000 and 2015. The same holds true in the U.S.: The study found that PSAT scores were lower during hotter years than years with cooler temperatures in the same school districts.

Cumulative heat exposure can also reduce how much students absorb in the classroom, while school air conditioning can mitigate heat’s impact on learning, according to a study published in 2020 by the American Economic Journal: Economic Policy.

The study found without air conditioning, a 1-degree Fahrenheit increase in temperatures reduces approximately 1% of a school year’s worth of learning. The study also discovered that the environment’s temperature appears to be a “meaningful contributor” to racial and geographic achievement gaps. Researchers found that Black and Hispanic students were inhibited from learning three times as much as white students—theoretically because these students were more likely to learn in classrooms without air-conditioning or reside in hotter locations.

Increased heat can also result in more disciplinary referrals, according to a 2022 working paper by a Harvard Kennedy School research fellow Kristen McCormack. On days when temperatures are between 80 and 90 degrees Fahrenheit and over 90 degrees, students were 4% and 9% more likely to be referred to an administrator for discipline than on school days with temperatures between 60 and 70 degrees.

Canva

A need to turn down the temperature

Elementary school students concentrate on laptops in a classroom.

According to a June 2020 report from the Government Accountability Office, approximately 36,000 schools across the country need to update or replace their HVAC units. About half of the schools GAO officials visited had older leaky systems, causing damage to floor and ceiling tiles. If these issues go unaddressed, they could lead to problems with indoor air quality and mold.

In the same study published by the American Economic Journal: Economic Policy modeling 10 million students who took the PSAT, researchers surmise that as much as 7% of the racial achievement gap can be explained by too much heat, with Black and Hispanic students bearing the brunt of this decline.

Studies are clear: U.S. schools must address the temperatures in their classrooms even as the world grapples with excessive heat. The Center for Climate Integrity estimates that by 2025, there will be a 39% increase since 1970 in the number of U.S. school districts expected to experience 32 or more days of temperatures over 80 degrees Fahrenheit—the threshold of days where schools typically install cooling systems. Without funding to help schools install and operate these systems, many students will be left languishing in the heat—and in terms of their education.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on Study.com and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Kids are going back to school during one of the hottest years on record. Here's how heat affects learning. appeared first on KVIA.

MMD Creative // Shutterstock

Despite skepticism about AI’s future, tech companies predict AI will continue to explode

Business person using computer with AI symbolic illustrations overlaid on the image to look like they are floating above the keyboard.

“During a gold rush, sell shovels.”

That saying—popular today among startups and investors—started after the California gold rush in the mid-1800s when those making the most money were the suppliers selling shovels and picks, not the gold-panners themselves. Today, it refers to profiting off the supplies, technology, or infrastructure needed by the millions of people trying to access or leverage a particular asset.

ChatGPT set off a new sort of gold rush—the artificial intelligence boom—in November 2022 when OpenAI launched the technology. Tech giants (the gold-panners in this metaphor) have since poured billions (and counting) into building AI systems for the masses while scrambling to be the first to add AI features to their products. Microsoft rolled out its “Copilot” system in 2023 for Windows users, while Apple and Google announced transcription and image-generation features for their phones in the last year.

To get a sense of how big the AI market will grow in the near future, Verbit analyzed financial research and recent data on trends around the technology. Skeptics note those racing to build AI systems have struggled to profit from their ventures, largely due to the expense of building and running the tech. But, for the “shovel-sellers” such as Nvidia, selling the computer chips required by tech companies to train AI models has proven wildly lucrative.

Since the debut of ChatGPT less than two years ago, shares in Nvidia have risen by more than 600%. In June, the chip manufacturer became the world’s most valuable company. The company’s rapid ascension—despite a slip in Nvidia shares since June—offers valuable insights into how companies and investors view the future of AI.

Verbit

Tech companies have a big gap to fill

A bar chart showing that tech companies will have to earn $600 billion a year in revenue to justify their hardware investments.

By the fourth quarter of 2024, tech companies will be spending $150 billion a year on Nvidia’s data center chips, according to an analysis published in June by David Cahn, a partner at venture capital firm Sequoia Capital. After accounting for operating costs such as electricity and salaries, Cahn said Sequoia estimates companies will need to generate $600 billion annually to break even on their AI investments.

Sequoia further predicts tech companies will make a combined $100 billion a year in the near term, Cahn said, amounting to a shortfall of about $500 billion. To earn back that money, tech companies must build smarter AI systems and actual physical infrastructure.

Current AI systems do a poor job of reasoning. While chatbots such as ChatGPT contain a wealth of knowledge and write grammatically sound sentences, they cannot take on complex projects alone. Meanwhile, training and deploying AI models takes a massive amount of electricity. Data centers may account for as much as 9% of U.S. power demand by 2030, according to a report published in May by the Electric Power Research Institute—up from 3% in 2022.

Gorodenkoff // Shutterstock

Still early days

Two workers in business attire, overlooking a factory.

Despite the hype, Census Bureau surveys show that just 5% of American companies say they are using AI to produce goods or services. Moreover, about 95% of companies using AI say that the technology has not changed their total employment levels.

While AI has dominated headlines over the last two years, people and companies using the technology regularly today are, in fact, early adopters. Only 23% of American adults have used ChatGPT, according to a survey conducted by the Pew Research Center in February.

Nvidia is set to ship its Blackwell Ultra chips later this year, which promise 2.5 times the performance at only a 25% increase in cost. In June, the company also announced a Rubin AI platform utilizing as-yet-unreleased HBM4, the next iteration of high-bandwidth memory.

Even AI pessimists must concede that the gold rush has at least one more cycle to run.

Story editing by Nicole Caldwell. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on Verbit and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Despite skepticism about AI's future, tech companies predict AI will continue to explode appeared first on KVIA.

Vladimir Mulder // Shutterstock

The worker shortage isn’t over. Here are the states where it’s most acute.

A large crane is positioned near the truck. The crane’s arm is extended, holding a grapple that is lifting logs from the ground.

The “most unusual job market in modern American history.” The “Great American Labor Shortage.” That’s how news reports were describing the massive disruption to the job market delivered by the COVID-19 pandemic by the latter half of 2021, when almost half of American companies were reporting a worker shortage.

Since then, the job market has shifted back toward something more akin to what the U.S. was used to before the pandemic arrived. But some industries and parts of the country are still hurting for workers—a trend that’s had ongoing ramifications for workers and consumers.

JobTest.org analyzed Bureau of Labor Statistics data compiled by the Chamber of Commerce to illustrate the current state of America’s ongoing labor shortage. The analysis uses the most recent data available at the national and state levels, from July and June 2024 respectively.

According to government jobs data, there were 8.2 million open jobs in the U.S. in July and only 7.1 million unemployed workers. Even if every unemployed worker had a job, the nation would still have millions of unfilled positions.

A shortage of workers can be a double-edged sword for consumers. On one hand, it means there are jobs available, and workers have some leverage to negotiate higher wages. On the other hand, it can cause companies to raise the price of the goods and services they offer to cover the cost of wage increases and attract more candidates to an open position. In the case of industries like health care or public education, difficulty finding skilled professionals to fill open positions can also make it harder for institutions to provide necessary services to the communities they serve.

Not every unemployed worker is suited for the jobs available, however. As seen in recent years, workers in some places have seen their cost of living rise so dramatically that the jobs offered in industries for which they may be qualified—such as hospitality, food service, and retail—are no longer appealing or even feasible.

JobTest.org

A shortage that’s slowly improving

A line chart showing the ratio of job openings to unemployed Americans seeking work from 2020-June 2024. The ratio spiked to 450 unemployed workers for every 100 jobs with the COVID-19 recession. The labor shortage then peaked in 2022 at 50 workers for every 100 jobs and has recovered some since, now sitting at 84 workers for every 100 jobs.

Still, Americans have trickled back into the workforce at a steady pace as short-term savings stockpiled in the early years of the pandemic ran out, and the cost of essentially everything began rising starting in 2021. Many of those workers took their time getting back to work after the pandemic’s initial disruption.

Evidence shows many Americans decided to start families. Women with children were noticeably absent from the workforce in significant numbers. Still often the default child care provider, many women didn’t return to the workforce prior to 2022 as they helped their kids with schoolwork until more schools opened to in-person education. Since then, labor force participation among women between 25 and 54 has actually surpassed pre-pandemic levels, according to BLS data as of May 2023. Meanwhile, many older Americans decided to pull the trigger early on retirement with no plans to return.

While some of those forces have eased, certain industries are still struggling to fill the positions they need.

JobTest.org

Industries where finding workers is hardest

A bar chart showing the unemployed workers in every industry for every job opening. Wholesale and retail trade had the largest surplus of labor with 148 available unemployed workers for every 100 job openings. Industries with shortages include leisure and hospitality, durable goods manufacturing, financial activities, government workers, professional and business services, education and health services, and mining and logging.

Several industries seeing the largest shortages of workers are feeling the early impacts of an aging workforce. In mining, the typical worker is reaching retirement age and not enough young workers are entering those jobs. McKinsey reported a 39% decrease in mining graduations in the United States since 2016. It’s a trend coming to a head as the U.S. finds renewed importance in sourcing metals like copper, lithium, and manganese domestically. U.S. firms are expected to increase their demand for metals with the transition to green technologies such as electric vehicles and solar energy.

In education, the teaching population has similarly been aging out of prime working years as the field has struggled to attract new, younger professionals. ADP Research Institute created indexes that measure employment and wages and found that teacher salaries have increased more slowly than the rest of the workforce, especially for those between 20 and 30 years old.

In health care, pandemic burnout, cost-cutting, and low wages have led to understaffing in many parts of the country. The American Medical Association estimates that about 83 million Americans don’t have access to a primary care physician.

Even in the financial services world, companies are struggling to find enough trained professionals to fill accounting roles. About 3 in 4 accountants in the U.S. are near or close to retirement age, yet the number of people taking CPA exams fell to a 17-year low in 2022, just above 67,000, according to the American Institute of Certified Public Accountants. This has placed added pressure on leaders in the field to cut down education requirements for accounting.

JobTest.org

States with the largest labor shortages

A map of the U.S. showing the ratio of unemployed workers to job openings. Nevada, Washington, and California have a surplus of workers, whereas midwestern and southern states including the Dakotas, Vermont, Virginia, and Maryland have more than two job openings for every available worker.

Location can be another important factor influencing companies’ ability to find qualified workers willing to accept open positions. Only three states—Washington, Nevada, and California—have more unemployed workers than job openings.

In Maine, Wyoming, Mississippi, New Hampshire, Maryland, Virginia, Vermont, South Dakota, and North Dakota, there are still roughly two job openings for every available worker, similar to the national average at its most extreme in 2022. They’re the states where the labor shortage is most dire.

Wages offered, work hours sought, existing skill sets, work experience, and the geographic location of the job can all influence the likelihood of matching unemployed workers to in-demand job openings.

Over the last few years, as job openings have far exceeded the unemployed population, reports have suggested that labor shortages could be due in part to a discrepancy between workers and employers on any or several of those factors—mismatched expectations on wages being among the most prominent. Employers have raised pay in certain industries like hospitality in response.

However, states are also attempting workforce training programs and efforts to find workers outside the U.S. willing to work for advertised rates. States like North Dakota, where jobs data suggests labor shortages are especially pronounced, are now pouring tax dollars into attracting immigrants to fill those positions and developing grant programs to find other innovative solutions to its workforce challenges.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns.

This story originally appeared on jobtest.org and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post The worker shortage isn't over. Here are the states where it's most acute. appeared first on KVIA.

otsphoto // Shutterstock

Most popular dog breeds in the US and the states where they’re #1

Golden Retriever holding American flag in mouth.

From bags of kibble in the grocery store to modern home sizes, things are getting smaller—and evidently, Americans are starting to look for furry friends that match. Small breeds like terriers and toys have largely dethroned the retrievers that once dominated the most popular breed rankings. This is a continuation of a trend that began in 2022 when the Labrador retriever lost its 31-year-long streak as #1 to the French bulldog, according to the American Kennel Club.

This shift may be partially attributable to the rising costs of pet products and veterinary care since smaller dogs are more economical for tighter budgets. Moreover, as remote work and nomadic living become increasingly more common, smaller dogs may appeal to those looking for pets that require less space and are easier to transport.

In fact, only two sporting dog breeds are the most popular in any American state—and neither is a Labrador retriever. The most popular dog overall represents 4% of all dogs in the country—constituting over 2.3 million out of 58 million households with dogs.

Ollie used data from U.S. News & World Report to further explore which dog breeds are the most popular in which states and what factors may drive residents’ preferences.

Canva

Chihuahua

Chihuahua puppy walking in grass.

Named after the northern Mexican state from which it originates, the Chihuahua is the smallest dog breed and one of the oldest, with a lineage that dates as far back as the ninth century. Today, the breed makes up a remarkable 4% of all dogs in the United States and is the most popular overall in 21 states. It ranks within the top five most common breeds in 42 states in total. Requiring just 200 to 250 calories per day but boasting a lifespan of 14 to 16 years, the Chihuahua offers owners low-cost longevity and is known for its adaptability and amusing personality.

Branislav Nenin // Shutterstock

French bulldog

Woman holding happy dog.

The French bulldog is a compact companion known for being friendly yet quiet, making it suitable for a range of lifestyles and homes. The breed has roots in the English bulldog, which was bred to a smaller size to accompany its working English owners, many of whom were artisans.

As such trades closed amid the Industrial Revolution, these workers and their little bulldogs moved to France, where the breed’s popularity began. The French developed a more standardized appearance which was iterated upon in the U.S. to develop the iconic bat ears. The breed has recently seen a massive increase in popularity, with AKC registrations surging by 1,000% between 2012 and 2022. Now, the French bulldog is the most popular dog in Florida, California, and Hawaii and is in the top five most common dogs in nearly half the remaining states.

PeopleImages.com – Yuri A

Golden retriever

Person walking four golden retrievers in the park.

With webbed paws and an affinity for water, golden retrievers are lucky pups to be the favored breed of the Midwest. They are the most popular dogs in states bordering the Great Lakes—Minnesota, Wisconsin, Michigan, Illinois, and Ohio; the entirety of the New England region minus Rhode Island; plus North Dakota, Nebraska, Colorado, and Virginia.

The iconic golden breed was developed in 19th-century Scotland to retrieve both from land and water during hunts, hence its swimming-related adaptations. Golden retrievers are known for their affectionate nature and eagerness to please, making them well-suited for service and other working dog roles.

ANNA TITOVA // Shutterstock

German shepherd

German shepherd running in grass.

As loyal as they are intelligent, German shepherds are among the favored breeds for guide, military, police, and search and rescue roles. The breed, which first arrived in America in the early 20th century, also enjoys peak popularity in Alaska, Montana, Wyoming, Delaware, and Pennsylvania. Athletic in nature, the breed requires lots of exercise, making them well-suited for homes with or near lots of open land. They are also well-adapted to cold temperatures and harsher climates due to their thick double coats of fur.

Canva

Shih tzu

Shih tzu with hair in bow sitting in grass.

The shih tzu, whose name means “lion” in Chinese, is king of the Empire State (New York) as well as Iowa, Rhode Island, and New Jersey. Roughly a quarter of New York state residents live in apartments, making the dog that averages 9 to 16 pounds perfect for compact households. Despite being known for its playfulness, the breed does not require much physical activity or space. The breed dates back over 1,000 years but was first brought to America surprisingly recently, following World War II. According to the American Kennel Club, every shih tzu alive today has direct lineage to just 14 shih tzus that were saved when the breed nearly went extinct during the Communist revolution.

Cavan-Images // Shutterstock

Goldendoodle

Goldendoodle laying on couch.

Representing the best of both worlds, the golden retriever and poodle hybrid is known for its friendly, sociable demeanor and trainability. Bred to be guide dogs in the 1960s, the hybrid is not recognized as an official breed by the AKC, so there is no breed standard. Goldendoodles can thus range from mini-sized to about 90 pounds and may have fur that is curly, straight, or somewhere in between. While not official, the family-friendly dog has left paw prints all over the country, ranking in the top five most popular dogs in 37 states. In Idaho and Utah, the goldendoodle is the most popular overall.

Anna Averianova // Shutterstock

Yorkshire terrier

Yorkshire terrier sitting in crocus flowers.

Maxing out at just 7 pounds, the Yorkshire terrier is the most popular breed among Maryland and Washington D.C. residents. This is not necessarily surprising considering the housing stock of the nation’s capital is comprised mostly of apartment units, making the pint-sized pup perfect for metropolitans. The toy breed was bred to chase rats out of mines and mills in 19th-century England, arriving in North America in the 1870s and gaining official recognition by the AKC in 1885. Now, the breed is among the top five most common dogs in 26 states. The breed is a true terrier at heart, known for its feisty yet affectionate nature.’

Additional research by Eliza Siegel. Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns.

This story originally appeared on Ollie and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Most popular dog breeds in the US and the states where they're #1 appeared first on KVIA.

maxim ibragimov // Shutterstock

The ‘sandwich generation’ is strained: How to save for retirement while caring for kids and aging parents

Silhouettes of a big family.

50 hours. That’s the amount of time America’s “sandwich generation” spends caring for both children and aging parents every week, according to a New York Life Wealth survey. These caretakers of multigenerational households are struggling under the financial and emotional burden of their responsibilities—especially when it comes to saving for the future.

Caring.com analyzed resources from the IRS, Family Caregiver Alliance, National Council on Aging, AARP, and other organizations supporting aging Americans to compile a list of ways to save money for retirement while caring for multiple generations under one roof.

The “sandwich generation” is a term often used to describe Americans in their 40s and 50s caring for elderly parents and their own children. It’s not just time they’re dedicating to care, it’s also money.

Amid higher-than-usual inflation, these Americans are experiencing cost overload during their peak earning years. Debt and difficulty saving are some of the top financial stressors they face. Of the sandwich generation caretakers who report having credit card debt, the average amount of debt is nearly twice that of the overall population, surveys suggest.

Longer lifespans, as well as higher housing and health care costs, are reshaping the long-term care experience for all Americans, let alone those also juggling the cost of raising children. Even for those looking to nursing homes to help alleviate the stress, worker shortages in long-term care have pushed the costs to new highs. The typical $8,000 per month cost now required for a semiprivate room at a nursing home makes at-home care look far more appealing. But it isn’t free of costs, including emotional costs.

Generally, setting aside 15% of monthly income for retirement from age 25 until 67 is recommended by investment experts. Saving that much may feel challenging with additional caregiving costs.

“Millennials are finding themselves sandwiched between responsibilities like caring for aging parents and milestones in their own life journeys, like starting their own families, purchasing a home, and saving for retirement,” New York Life vice president Jeff Beligotti said in a statement.

Intentionally cutting down on how much is spent on those added expenses can go a long way toward sustaining a retirement. And it begins, as so much else in financial planning does, by convening and communicating with every stakeholder.

Canva

Can parents contribute to the cost of care?

A young person’s hand on top of an elderly hand.

It’s one thing for an aging parent to live under the same roof as their child and grandchildren, but it’s another when they begin to lose the ability to care for themselves—especially if their child and their child’s partner are providing financially for the household.

It can be helpful to have a conversation about how to handle late-life care expenses before a parent starts to lose their independence and specifically how aging parents can contribute to the cost of care if they have the means, according to the Family Caregiver Alliance.

The association provides guidance for writing a contract outlining a financial agreement with a family member who needs care. Personal care agreements can be helpful because they can help avoid future conflicts by setting expectations up front.

Canva

Home and community-based services Medicaid waivers

Two younger people helping an elderly man.

But not every aging parent has the resources to contribute to their own home care. Home and community-based services Medicaid waivers offer an avenue for obtaining financial compensation for in-home care for the elderly as an alternative to nursing home care. It’s a program for Medicaid-eligible Americans with limited income and assets. Similar programs also exist in veterans’ programs as well as some life insurance and long-term care policies.

Under the waiver program, the person receiving care can choose who will provide it. They can choose a family member or other loved one, and that caregiver can receive compensation from Medicaid for services like bathing, dressing, and preparing meals.

Caregivers can generally expect to be paid slightly under the hourly rate for professional home health providers. That can range from $21 to $35 per hour depending on the state or city someone lives in.

These waivers can also require joining a waitlist because states are able to cap how many waivers are available. People on waiver waiting lists had to wait an average of 36 months to be approved by their state in 2023, according to an analysis from KFF. Each state has a different name for its elder care waiver program. A list of state programs for HCBS can be found here, and a local area agency on aging can help with applications.

Canva

Claiming an elderly parent as a dependent on your taxes

A young woman putting a jacket around an elderly woman.

You can also potentially save money by claiming an elderly parent you care for as a dependent when it comes time to file taxes.

If the parent is unable to care for themselves and requires assistance, it’s possible to receive as much as $3,000 in tax credits per person cared for. To claim the parent as a dependent, the parent must have earned less than $5,050 in income for tax year 2024, not including income from social security. They should also have lived with the taxpayer for more than half of the year.

Canva

Prescription drugs

A woman ordering a prescription online.

About 9 in 10 people 65 and over take prescription drugs of some sort, and their costs can add up quickly. Pharmacies will often price drugs differently, and taking the time to compare Medicare prescription prices at different pharmacies could pay off.

The National Council on Aging recommends budget pharmacies including Walmart, Costco, and Amazon. It also suggests using prescription savings tools like RubyWell, which can locate discounts for prescriptions at local pharmacies. Mark Cuban Cost Plus Drugs is another new drug wholesaler that offers low-cost mail-order prescription drugs. Choosing the generic version of any prescription drug over a name brand can also help lower costs.

Canva

Bargain hunting on items like walkers, gloves, and incontinence supplies

A woman working on a laptop with a baby in her lap.

Caring for an elderly parent can mean purchasing items you wouldn’t otherwise buy for your household including regularly stocking up on supplies for bathing, transportation, and basic hygiene.

There are savings to be found when shopping for products through medical supply specialists that purchase in bulk and pass savings on to customers. The NCOA recommended Carewell. Other sites like Discount Medical Supplies could also help with savings.

Canva

Transportation costs

An elderly woman on a virtual appointment.

Since the height of the COVID-19 pandemic, it’s been far easier to find primary care providers offering virtual appointments, and using that option when possible can help cut down on gasoline costs and valuable time spent traveling.

Experts also now consider virtual care an adequate replacement for in-person doctor visits in many circumstances. According to a National Electronic Health Records Survey conducted in 2021, primary care providers, in particular, are more likely than other kinds of providers to say that the care they provide virtually is similar in quality to the care they provide in person.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns. Photo selection by Lacy Kerrick.

This story originally appeared on Caring.com and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post The 'sandwich generation' is strained: How to save for retirement while caring for kids and aging parents appeared first on KVIA.

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

Which states have a thriving small-business landscape, according to data?

A small downtown main street.

Small businesses are the backbone of the American economy. Defined by the Small Business Administration as firms with fewer than 500 employees, small businesses make up 99.9% of all companies. They also fuel employment, with nearly half (46%) of private sector workers employed at small businesses, accounting for 43.5% of the country’s overall economic output.

U.S. NAICS Codes analyzed data from the Bureau of Labor Statistics to see which states have the healthiest environments for small businesses.

In the United States, around 4 in 5 small businesses are solo ventures without employees, which can include real estate brokerages, construction contractors, freelance artists, and small online retailers. Small businesses with employees tend to be more dynamic than their larger counterparts, accounting for at least 3 in 5 (63%) new jobs in America between 1995 and 2021.

The demographics of who owns small businesses reveal disparities along gender and racial lines, according to SBA data. Women tend to be underrepresented, making up less than half (42%) of solo business owners and merely 22% of businesses that employ workers. Black Americans, comprising 14% of the population, own 12% of solo ventures but just 2.4% of those with employees.

An important distinction for BLS data is that it covers establishments rather than firms. This means the numbers correspond to individual physical locations and include big corporations with many small locations—think Starbucks or McDonald’s—each accounting for a single establishment. Even so, the numbers still indicate how small businesses are faring.

States were ranked by the percentage change in the number of small establishments between 2022 and 2023. Montana did the best in 2023 by this measure, with small establishments in the Treasure State growing by 12.1%. Small businesses also boomed in Virginia and Oregon. In contrast, Washington state saw a 15% decline in small establishments in 2023, indicating a less hospitable environment for small enterprises.

Read on to see how small businesses fared nationwide in 2023.

Canva

#50. Washington

Seattle skyline.

– Small establishments, 2023: 231,670
— 15.2% decrease from 2022
— 98.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,643,020 (55.5% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,300
— $470 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#49. New Mexico

A small market in Santa Fe.

– Small establishments, 2023: 61,010
— 4.3% decrease from 2022
— 98.5% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 426,590 (63.7% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $0,960
— $120 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#48. Nebraska

An aerial view of downtown Omaha.

– Small establishments, 2023: 70,880
— 4.1% decrease from 2022
— 98.5% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 515,080 (62.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,030
— $140 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#47. Iowa

The Des Moines skyline.

– Small establishments, 2023: 102,170
— 0.5% increase from 2022
— 98.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 788,220 (61.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,020
— $170 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#46. Indiana

An aerial view of Nappanee, IN.

– Small establishments, 2023: 178,890
— 0.9% increase from 2022
— 97.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,508,550 (55.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,040
— $170 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#45. Maryland

An aerial view of Annapolis.

– Small establishments, 2023: 179,250
— 1.2% increase from 2022
— 98.2% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,270,900 (59.0% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,320
— $160 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#44. New York

A busy New York street.

– Small establishments, 2023: 667,110
— 1.3% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 4,151,540 (52.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,510
— $570 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#43. Pennsylvania

Downtown Scranton.

– Small establishments, 2023: 365,180
— 1.7% increase from 2022
— 97.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 3,012,770 (57.5% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,230
— $190 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#42. Illinois

The downtown Chicago skyline at sunset.

– Small establishments, 2023: 378,550
— 2.3% increase from 2022
— 97.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 2,550,780 (49.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,330
— $270 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#41. Wyoming

An aerial view of Casper, WY.

– Small establishments, 2023: 28,000
— 2.8% increase from 2022
— 99.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 166,260 (80.7% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,080
— $80 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#40. Massachusetts

Downtown Northampton, MA.

– Small establishments, 2023: 282,200
— 3.3% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,705,560 (54.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,590
— $390 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#39. Nevada

Neon signs on a small street in Henderson, NV at night.

– Small establishments, 2023: 102,830
— 3.7% increase from 2022
— 98.2% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 740,510 (55.6% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,210
— $20 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#38. Louisiana

A streetcar in downtown New Orleans.

– Small establishments, 2023: 143,700
— 3.8% increase from 2022
— 98.5% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,023,080 (64.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,020
— $150 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#37. Florida

Businesses on a small street lined with palm trees.

– Small establishments, 2023: 852,840
— 4.0% increase from 2022
— 98.6% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 5,051,490 (59.0% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,260
— $80 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#36. Wisconsin

The Capitol in Madison.

– Small establishments, 2023: 188,200
— 4.0% increase from 2022
— 98.0% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,452,070 (58.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,050
— $180 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#35. Texas

Downtown Austin.

– Small establishments, 2023: 788,810
— 4.0% increase from 2022
— 97.8% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 6,374,040 (54.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,290
— $240 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#34. New Jersey

Atlantic City.

– Small establishments, 2023: 303,870
— 4.1% increase from 2022
— 98.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 2,087,160 (58.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,410
— $310 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#33. North Dakota

Downtown Fargo.

– Small establishments, 2023: 32,260
— 4.3% increase from 2022
— 98.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 233,120 (68.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,150
— $100 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#32. South Dakota

Downtown Deadwood.

– Small establishments, 2023: 36,510
— 4.4% increase from 2022
— 98.8% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 246,920 (67.6% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,010
— $90 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#31. Utah

Downtown Ogden, UT at night.

– Small establishments, 2023: 126,230
— 4.5% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 856,000 (60.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,120
— $140 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#30. Arkansas

Fayetteville, AR in Fall.

– Small establishments, 2023: 96,100
— 4.6% increase from 2022
— 98.5% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 654,600 (60.9% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $0,980
— $180 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#29. Maine

A small street in Belfast, ME.

– Small establishments, 2023: 59,830
— 4.7% increase from 2022
— 98.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 352,420 (67.9% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,100
— $100 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#28. Kansas

Downtown Topeka.

– Small establishments, 2023: 88,750
— 4.8% increase from 2022
— 98.1% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 685,240 (59.0% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,080
— $110 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#27. Ohio

An aerial view of Columbus.

– Small establishments, 2023: 315,070
— 5.0% increase from 2022
— 97.8% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 2,643,430 (56.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,090
— $180 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#26. Alaska

Businesses on the water.

– Small establishments, 2023: 22,420
— 5.0% increase from 2022
— 98.6% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 149,880 (63.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,080
— $240 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#25. New Hampshire

Portsmouth, NH.

– Small establishments, 2023: 59,930
— 5.1% increase from 2022
— 98.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 386,820 (65.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,450
— $60 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#24. Alabama

An aerial view of Montgomery.

– Small establishments, 2023: 145,220
— 5.4% increase from 2022
— 98.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,040,560 (61.7% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,050
— $100 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#23. Georgia

An aerial view of Atlanta.

– Small establishments, 2023: 362,270
— 5.6% increase from 2022
— 98.2% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 2,256,480 (54.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,210
— $200 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#22. South Carolina

An aerial view of Charleston.

– Small establishments, 2023: 166,680
— 5.9% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,128,300 (60.6% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,070
— $70 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#21. California

A small street in Palm Springs.

– Small establishments, 2023: 1,686,450
— 6.0% increase from 2022
— 98.8% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 8,917,840 (58.5% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,300
— $440 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#20. Missouri

An aerial view of Springfield, MO.

– Small establishments, 2023: 227,770
— 6.2% increase from 2022
— 98.6% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,458,010 (59.7% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,070
— $190 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#19. Rhode Island

Small stores in Rhode Island.

– Small establishments, 2023: 46,610
— 6.2% increase from 2022
— 98.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 262,810 (63.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,170
— $140 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#18. Oklahoma

Broken Arrow, OK.

– Small establishments, 2023: 120,120
— 6.4% increase from 2022
— 98.5% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 850,080 (63.9% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $0,970
— $150 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#17. West Virginia

Harpers Ferry, WV.

– Small establishments, 2023: 53,310
— 6.9% increase from 2022
— 98.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 360,760 (66.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $0,960
— $110 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#16. Delaware

Wilmington, DE skyline.

– Small establishments, 2023: 41,540
— 6.9% increase from 2022
— 98.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 217,470 (55.0% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,190
— $280 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#15. Connecticut

A small street in Greenwich.

– Small establishments, 2023: 140,030
— 7.1% increase from 2022
— 98.6% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 858,450 (60.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,670
— $220 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#14. Minnesota

Duluth, MN.

– Small establishments, 2023: 197,620
— 7.3% increase from 2022
— 98.1% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,328,920 (53.9% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,220
— $270 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#13. Mississippi

Jackson, MS.

– Small establishments, 2023: 79,780
— 7.7% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 577,820 (62.4% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $0,870
— $60 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#12. Kentucky

Lexington, KY.

– Small establishments, 2023: 140,900
— 7.9% increase from 2022
— 98.2% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 936,050 (56.2% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,030
— $130 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#11. North Carolina

Wilmington, NC.

– Small establishments, 2023: 350,010
— 8.2% increase from 2022
— 98.4% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 2,397,490 (58.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,140
— $230 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#10. Vermont

Rutland, VT.

– Small establishments, 2023: 29,450
— 8.5% increase from 2022
— 99.0% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 170,000 (67.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,140
— $60 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#9. Arizona

Downtown Tucson, AZ.

– Small establishments, 2023: 208,240
— 8.5% increase from 2022
— 97.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,347,950 (48.9% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,220
— $120 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#8. Idaho

Downtown Boise, ID.

– Small establishments, 2023: 87,120
— 8.7% increase from 2022
— 99.0% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 479,600 (69.0% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,020
— $80 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#7. Tennessee

Memphis, TN.

– Small establishments, 2023: 204,360
— 8.8% increase from 2022
— 98.0% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,548,890 (55.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,160
— $120 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#6. Hawai’i

Lahaina Harbor in Hawai‘i.

– Small establishments, 2023: 52,830
— 9.7% increase from 2022
— 98.8% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 334,170 (65.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,100
— $80 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#5. Michigan

Downtown Ann Arbor, MI.

– Small establishments, 2023: 300,020
— 10.1% increase from 2022
— 98.1% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,900,220 (50.8% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,110
— $200 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#4. Colorado

Telluride, CO.

– Small establishments, 2023: 255,660
— 10.5% increase from 2022
— 98.7% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,529,230 (63.7% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,430
— $170 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#3. Oregon

An aerial view of downtown Portland, OR.

– Small establishments, 2023: 188,600
— 11.0% increase from 2022
— 98.9% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,100,840 (65.3% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,130
— $180 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#2. Virginia

Fredericksburg, VA.

– Small establishments, 2023: 337,210
— 11.5% increase from 2022
— 98.6% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 1,989,420 (60.5% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,270
— $230 a week below state private sector average

Canva

#1. Montana

Downtown Anaconda, MT.

– Small establishments, 2023: 61,460
— 12.1% increase from 2022
— 99.3% of all establishments
– Total small establishment workers:
— 317,570 (77.1% of total private sector)
– Average weekly small establishment wages in 2023: $1,000
— $80 a week below state private sector average

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close. Photo selection by Lacy Kerrick.

This story originally appeared on U.S. NAICS Codes and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Which states have a thriving small-business landscape, according to data? appeared first on KVIA.

Petrovich Nataliya // Shutterstock

The US leads the world in fruit and nut imports, but is our out-of-season produce hurting the planet?

Person holding avocado in market.

Even in the dead of winter, American shoppers are treated to a cornucopia of choice in the grocery aisles. Peruvian grapes, Costa Rican pineapples, Mexican strawberries—many pantry staples begin their journeys to American tables thousands of miles away.

In 2022, more than half of the fruits and nuts consumed by Americans are imported, based on the latest USDA data. What’s more, just one trading partner makes up close to 48% of fruit and nut import value. Who else made it to the list? Using 2023 Census data, Live It Up broke down the top countries that provide fresh fruit and nuts to U.S. consumers.

Though farm-to-table and slow food movements have been buzzwords in the industry, imports have been steadily increasing over the past decades, aided by a number of factors, including better transportation infrastructure, container shipping, and storage technology. An increasingly diverse American population has also brought a more global diet that includes fruits such as avocados and papayas. But, it is legislation that has had a large impact on what shoppers can purchase.

The North American Free Trade Agreement, which came into effect in 1994, eliminated import and export tariffs from goods traded between the U.S., Mexico, and Canada, ushering in a new era of free trade. It also granted each country “most-favored-nation” status for trading.

NAFTA gave U.S. consumers unprecedented access to year-round warm climates for growing fresh produce, which made way for a surge of fruits and nuts from abroad. Whereas, in 2008, imports accounted for nearly 36% of fruit and nuts in value, they accounted for nearly 60% by 2022. 

Easy access to produce grown in tropical climates has also coincided with changing taste buds in the U.S. For example, after NAFTA came into force, the amount of avocados available per person—an indicator of consumption—tripled to nearly 8 pounds as of 2021. 

In 2023, the U.S. imported $22.37 billion worth of fruits and nuts, but only exported about $14.87 billion. The large deficit stems from fruit as opposed to nuts. According to the Observatory of Economic Complexity, the U.S. is the world’s largest exporter of nuts, such as almonds, pistachios, and walnuts. In 2022, the U.S. exported a total of $8.33 billion of nuts around the world and imported $989 million. Mexico was the largest partner and accounted for $478 million of imports.

Live It Up

Mexico is the main source of US fruit and nut imports

Table showing that the U.S. looks to Latin America for fruit and nut supply. Five countries accounted for 78% of U.S. fruit and nut imports in 2023. These countries are Mexico (47%), Peru (11%), Chile (8%), Guatemala (7%), Costa Rica (5%).

Mexico is not just the largest market for U.S. nuts; the country, in turn, outpaces other food and nut partners in American groceries. Shoppers frequently purchase avocados from Mexico, but also raspberries, strawberries, grapes, lemons, and limes. Factors such as proximity to the U.S. via a shared land border, tropical climate, and relatively low labor costs contribute to Mexico’s status as a top U.S. trading partner.

Although NAFTA brought many benefits, such as increasing variety in U.S. supermarkets and boosting investment and trade between its member states, some of its broader effects may not be so palatable. For example, the presence of U.S. companies in Mexico has increased fertilizer and chemical-related pollution and deforestation rates, contributing to global warming. Increased import of goods has also led to more carbon emissions. A study published in June 2022 in Nature Food reported that transporting food accounts for around 19% of total food-system emissions.

Transportation is just one facet of the discussion, however, as sustainability expert Pablo Päster explained on Treehugger. There is also the suitability of growing fruits in their natural climates to consider.

“[The] net emissions will likely favor the imports because non-tropical climates simply do not support the efficient production of tropical fruits,” Päster wrote. Using fertilizers and pesticides, watering requirements, and greenhouse infrastructure to grow tropical fruits domestically all add to its emissions—additions that may not be needed when fruit production happens in the proper climate.

From a nutritional perspective, it is easy to see how increased availability and consumption of fresh produce positively impacts health. Yet, while U.S. consumers may benefit from the increased availability of fruits and nuts, some argue that free trade may have had the opposite impact on partner countries. Mexico has ended up importing more unhealthy processed foods. Some critics also note that Mexico missed a window for more development by removing industry protections without a guarantee of investments from its richer partners. The U.S., too, saw its manufacturing jobs move south across the border.

In 2020, NAFTA was replaced with the United States-Mexico-Canada Agreement. USMCA is in many ways an extension of NAFTA in that it places zero tariffs on the same agricultural products while providing broader opportunities for U.S. exports to Canada of dairy, poultry, and egg products. This means that even though NAFTA is no longer with us, trends in the trade of fruit and nuts are likely to continue.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on Live It Up and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post The US leads the world in fruit and nut imports, but is our out-of-season produce hurting the planet? appeared first on KVIA.

Bryan Bedder/Getty Images for IMG // Getty Images

5 affordable and creative venue ideas perfect for a baby shower

Many pink balloons hanging from a ceiling for a party.

The traditional baby shower, where family and friends gather and celebrate the mother-to-be and unborn baby with gifts, has evolved immensely since its 20th-century origins. What was once reserved for middle- and upper-class American families is now customary for anyone expecting a baby, and showers that include parents and guests of all genders have become increasingly popular.

In 2024, baby showers are still a way for family and friends to celebrate the future arrival of a newborn, and they encompass more than just gifts. These parties are often themed and hosted by a family member or close friend. The events can range from simplistic to extravagant depending on the expecting parent’s preferences and the host’s budget.

Traditionally, baby showers include food, drinks, games, and gifts; however, the host must also budget for decor, invitations, prizes, favors, and, most importantly, a venue. With the current state of inflation, costs are getting so unbearable that some hosts ask guests and co-hosts to pitch in financially to help stretch the budget.

The venue is generally the most significant expense for any party, but that doesn’t always have to be the case. There are a variety of great venues for hosting a baby shower that won’t break the bank—some are even free.

Using various sources that track cost and trends, Peerspace compiled a list of five affordable and creative venue ideas that are perfect for a baby shower. For a venue to qualify, it needed to cost $150 or less to rent; however, costs vary depending on geographic location, so be sure to call or visit a venue’s website to confirm its rates.

Read on for baby shower venue inspiration.

triocean // Shutterstock

Local park

A baby shower set up outdoors with string lights, baby baskets with stuffed animals atop of low tables, blanketed seating on the floor, and white, brown, and tan balloons tied in bunches.

If the idea of a nature-filled event appeals, but the budget doesn’t support the cost of renting a space like a botanical garden, a local park is an excellent, affordable (sometimes even free) alternative. Park baby showers grew in popularity during the coronavirus pandemic because they allowed for social distancing in well-ventilated spaces—but spending time outside never goes out of style. The ample space is also perfect for organizing games and activities, making them a great option for larger parties.

Many parks around the country allow visitors to gather for picnics free of charge; however, if your local park features sheltered areas or large tabled picnic and barbecue areas, chances are you need to reserve the space in advance.

The pricing often varies depending on the park and size of your party but is usually between $25 to $100. For example, picnic permits at Griffith Park in Los Angeles cost $100 for a party of up to 100 guests and may include additional charges like $30 for staffing fees, if applicable. At Austin parks, picnic site rentals start at $60 per day. Reservation information is typically available on local park department websites.

Lance McMillan/Toronto Star // Getty Images

Places of worship

An expecting mother posing for a photo next to turquoise, peach, and gold balloons while someone takes a photo on their smartphone.

Faith is important to many people, and throwing a baby shower at the expecting parents’ place of worship could be really special. Many religious centers take reservations for their gathering spaces, and it’s usually free (especially if you’re a member).

If your church doesn’t have rental space (or if you don’t attend a church), check to see if one of the co-hosts or someone else close to the family does. If you don’t have luck finding a space this way, many offer these services to anyone—not just members—and might just ask for a donation or a nominal fee to rent the space.

These spots make suitable venues for secular baby showers, too. They often have a kitchen and plenty of space for large parties. Many have parking lots, too, which is always a bonus.

Francine Orr / Los Angeles Times via Getty Images // Getty Images

Bookstore

A children’s bookstore with blanket stuffed rabbit attached to a shelf.

If you’re planning a baby shower for a literary-loving parent-to-be, a bookstore is a fantastic venue. Many independent bookstores around the country have gathering spaces, and some take reservations for a small fee. If you don’t see information online, call your local bookstore to see what they offer.

Bonus tip: Reading books to an infant is a fantastic way to bond during those early months of parenthood. If you’re hosting a baby shower at a bookstore (or even if you’re not), asking guests to bring a children’s book instead of a card is a great way to start a beloved family collection. This trending baby shower task is a fun alternative to traditional cards and something the family can treasure for years to come.

RemainandRemind // Shutterstock

Pool

A baby shower at a pool with large decorative blocks that spells the word boy.

By the third trimester of pregnancy, when most baby showers take place, the birthing parent will probably feel physically uncomfortable. A poolside baby shower is not only a fun idea for guests, but could also make the celebrated parent feel more comfortable as they weightlessly float in the water and beat the heat in the warmer months.

Websites and apps offer private pools by the hour for affordable prices if the host or someone they know doesn’t have a pool suitable for an event. Just make sure the owner is okay with you throwing a party first.

Canva

Community center

Women gathered together on sofas around a pregnant woman, drinking from Champagne flutes while smiling and talking.

Community centers often boast several rooms to choose from, depending on the size of your gathering. They are generally affordable to rent (roughly $25 to $100, or sometimes even free)—Santa Fe community centers cost $50 per day per activity.

Many local community centers will let the host bring decorations. They also usually have parking lots, which makes it easy for guests.

Story editing by Carren Jao. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn. Photo selection by Lacy Kerrick.

This story originally appeared on Peerspace and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post 5 affordable and creative venue ideas perfect for a baby shower appeared first on KVIA.

Shutterstock // Comeback Images

States with the most assisted-living facilities per capita

Smiling elderly man and woman sitting at table, another senior couple in background sitting on sofa in white large room.

The United States is facing a caregiving crisis.

As America’s population ages and adults are staying active for longer, many are choosing to live in assisted-living facilities.

Assisted-living facilities offer 24-hour care but are less hands-on than nursing homes. They can offer the best of both worlds for a generation that values independence. Still, low staffing levels are causing facilities to raise prices and, in some cases, close their doors entirely, exacerbating an already severe care gap.

Residents of assisted-living facilities generally have their own apartments with shared amenities, offering more privacy and autonomy. They are also typically less expensive than nursing homes or home care.

Compare Home Health Care Agencies examined data compiled by the Department of Homeland Security’s Geospatial Management Office to find which parts of the country have the highest rate of assisted-living facilities per 100,000 residents over 65. While facilities have varying numbers of beds that can accommodate more patients, the number of facilities is used since bed data was not available for some states.

After dipping in 2020, occupancy rates at assisted-living facilities have largely recovered since the COVID-19 pandemic—faster than nursing homes and independent living communities. However, tough working conditions, like being able to lift patients and deal with stressed and angry family members, combined with low wages, have caused a workforce shortage.

Fewer nurses and other medical professionals on staff can lead to a lack of individual attention and care. To remedy this, the Centers for Medicare and Medicaid Services implemented requirements in April 2024 to increase staff-to-patient ratios; however, senior living facilities say the new staffing rules, which will be phased in over the next five years, are onerous.

The result is a face-off between government regulations and the private sector, which has been criticized for maximizing profits while not meeting patient needs and, in some cases, abuse and neglect.

Compare Home Health Care Agencies

How states are preparing for an aging population

A map showing the number of assisted living facilities per 100,000 adults.

Since states, rather than the federal government, regulate assisted-living facilities, the quality and cost of care can vary greatly depending on location.

In Michigan, there is only one assisted-living facility per 100,000 residents over 65. According to a March 2024 State of Reform report, the state estimated that it is short 36,000 direct care workers, including certified nursing assistants, and that more than a third of nursing homes are turning away new patients every month.

Alaska, on the other hand, has the most assisted-living facilities per capita as more Americans decide to retire in the Last Frontier. In the last decade, the number of residents between 65 and 74 nearly doubled, according to the state’s Health Department, and developers have built facilities accordingly. However, the cost of care is among the highest in the nation. Alaskans pay about $7,250 per month for assisted living, 35% higher than the national average.

To rectify disparities, states have tried to boost home-based care by increasing workers’ pay and offering training programs. At the federal level, the Senate held its first hearing on assisted-living facilities in two decades in January, calling for increased oversight.

Since then, members of the Senate Special Committee on Aging have requested that the Government Accountability Office examine how much the federal government spends on assisted-living facilities each year. They are also soliciting information on quality and cost of care from families who have navigated the system.

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close. Photo selection by Ania Antecka.

This story originally appeared on Compare Home Health Care Agencies and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post States with the most assisted-living facilities per capita appeared first on KVIA.

Thx4Stock team // Shutterstock

10 unscrupulous scams that target senior citizens

An old man accepted a call from an unknown person.

However many reasons we have for loving our grandparents, scammers have a whole lot more. That’s why fraudsters and hackers are increasingly relentless in targeting a demographic that is often trusting of financial institutions, perhaps too embarrassed to report a loss and at a disadvantage where digital technology is concerned. Seniors offer an easy jackpot for scammers, to the tune of $3 billion in losses annually. They are often homeowners, sitting on top of savings, and in good credit. 

Spokeo warns to watch out for these 10 senior citizen scams that target their hard-earned savings. 

1. Romance Scams

Flattery has no expiration date, and many a lonely or bereaved senior has found themselves on the receiving end of sudden romantic attention from a curious source. Fraudsters troll social media in search of single seniors and love-bomb them at first with sweet nothings. Soon, however, these give way to something in the form of requests for money, airplane tickets, visas and so on. That’s why it’s important to set your social media accounts private and do a reverse search of any profile photos or contact details for strangers who do get in touch. 

2. Funeral Scams

Fraudsters know that we’re at our most vulnerable when we’re bereaved. The most cynical will scour death notices in their local press in order to reach out to widowed seniors about an unpaid debt or legacy their spouse left behind. There should be no need for urgency, however. Take their contact details, run a search and expose any scams before they are allowed to progress. 

3. Fake Accident — the Original Grandparent Scam

Facebook is the social media platform of choice for seniors, and too many allow themselves to share too much. It’s no challenge for a fraudster to scour a senior’s profile for family members, then reach out pretending to be a favorite grandchild in an emergency. Usually, the scammer will use a messaging platform to request an emergency transfer to cover hospital treatment, evacuation or some other made-up scenario. Worse still, they often exploit the grandparent’s loyalty by swearing them to secrecy. If in doubt, call your grandchild on the number you have stored, or do a reverse check on the number you’ve been given. 

4. Gone Phishing

Seniors did not grow up with email, so some are still unaware that if a message comes into the inbox from the IRS, Social Security Administration, Medicare or the bank, it’s probably not authentic. The worst scams contain obvious errors, but the most convincing ones weave a credible tale that may be backed up with threats of prosecution or arrest. Pressed for unpaid taxes or personal information, victims click on the link provided and unwittingly hand control of their banking or personal information to the hacker. 

Did you know that you can look up the owner of any email address by performing a reverse email search? You may find the owner’s name, address, age, social profiles and much more.

5. Medicare Scam

Fraudsters know that anyone over the age of 65 in the U.S. has Medicare. Since the pandemic, in particular, scammers have exploited panic about vaccines and testing to offer bogus services that require a Medicare ID. As soon as they have what they need, these criminals bill Medicare and pocket the cash, leaving the senior out of pocket and vulnerable. 

6. Tech “Support”

The next time Grandma asks for help fixing her laptop, do whatever it takes because scammers are waiting in the wings to swoop in to take advantage. It starts with a call from a seemingly authentic number announcing that a well-known tech service provider has identified a serious problem and needs access to the laptop. With the clock ticking and the threat of a security breach rising, it’s easy to comply. By the time a senior realizes that the security breach was self-administered, any funds or savings are usually long gone. 

A far more sinister version involves a seemingly concerned call from a bank warning that a savings account has been hacked. The victim is urged to transfer money to a “safe” account temporarily while the bank addresses the problem. The call may even offer a number to call back to verify, which is itself bogus. 

7. Robocalls

A similar scam starts with a less dramatic scenario, perhaps, but with no less urgency. The senior receives a call that a familiar service is about to expire and payment is needed. The purpose is either to obtain bank details and passwords or to record a voice sample that can be used to authorize payments on a stolen or cloned credit card. 

8. Investment Opportunities

Hackers know that many senior citizens are sitting on a pot of accumulated wealth, and are only too happy to help liberate that cash from its safe storage. The psychological trick these scammers use is to suggest that current savings are likely to be hit by inheritance taxes or might not cover the cost of retirement living. Luckily, they have a “unique and exclusive” investment opportunity that will deliver outstanding dividends. Instead, it’s likely to be a pyramid scheme, property scam or sophisticated offshore fraud. 

9. Reverse Mortgage

Reverse mortgages, or home-equity conversion mortgages, increased by a staggering 1,300% between 1999 and 2008 (the property crash). They’re still a popular target for scammers today. Fraudsters will approach homeowners with an unsolicited offer to either reassess the value of the property or liberate capital. Unfortunately, these reverse-mortgage scams do nothing of the sort; their goal is actually to steal the equity of the property entirely, leaving senior citizens potentially destitute. 

10. Fake Websites

The senior section of the spoof website collection includes sites that target the most common pain points for seniors. Top of the list are fake websites for cheap pharmaceuticals, prescription drugs, antiaging products and relief for various ailments. The site may appear to carry all the badges and certificates of the appropriate regulatory agencies, but scammers are counting on the fact that by the time a victim has paid, realized the scam and reported it, the money is out of reach.

The post 10 unscrupulous scams that target senior citizens appeared first on KVIA.

Jose Calsina // Shutterstock

Cities where Millennials and Gen Z have the highest credit card debt

A group of young women dining out and one of them pays with a credit card.

Credit card balances are increasing for just about everyone, but younger consumers are seeing average balances spike faster than others, Experian data shows. As of June 2024, average credit card balances for millennials have grown by 8.7% to $6,819 and by 8.2% to $3,407 for Generation Z consumers annually, outpacing the balance growth among older consumers.

Possible explanations for the outsized increases among younger consumers vary. Some increased borrowing can be expected entering adulthood, since all those “firsts” often come with hefty price tags. And the costs of entering adulthood have increased significantly this decade on expenses that go well beyond the price of a morning beverage.

In this update, Experian identified the 12 metro areas where the youngest generations of consumers — millennials and Generation Z — are spending even more than their counterparts living elsewhere in the U.S.

Experian

12 Metros Where Card Balances Are Increasing the Most for Millennials and Gen Z

Table showing data on “Average Credit Card Balance by Generation”.

Noting one generation in a city with rapidly rising credit card balances might be waved away as a statistical blip. However, if everyone under the age of 44 with credit card debt is collectively carrying significantly more credit card debt than the population at large, then it appears more than likely there may be local conditions feeding the added debt burdens in some cities.

Experian

Cities Where Average Millennials and Gen Z Credit Card Debt Increased More Than 10% Annually

Data via map and table listing “Cities Where Average Millennials and Gen Z Credit Card Debt Increased More Than 10% Annually”.

San Francisco and Honolulu are the two largest metros on this list of cities where younger consumers saw the biggest rise in credit card statement balances. Both metros are notoriously expensive no matter the economic climate, so it’s probably not too much of a surprise to see credit card balances increase significantly more than the overall nationwide increase of 5.2%.

But for the majority of other metros, one explanation dominates: Growth. Wherever younger people are spending and borrowing more on their credit cards than elsewhere, the more likely the metro is booming, both in population and economic activity.

Experian

Younger Consumers Face Equal or Greater Financial Burdens

Table showing data on “Young Spenders in Growing Cities”.

It’s not as though younger credit card users are spending more than others because of outright consumerism — there are other expenditures at play, as mentioned previously.

Auto costs, for example, don’t discriminate by age or financial situation: A Toyota Camry costs as much for a 30-year-old driver earning $50,000 a year as someone who is twice as old and earns twice as much. Experian data shows that younger and older drivers owe similar amounts on the auto loans they carry, which isn’t the case for most other types of consumer loans.

Indeed, if anything, age and credit conspire to make the costs of driving and insurance for a Camry more expensive for those just starting out: Premiums tend to be higher, and credit scores lower, than for older drivers. (Take heart; at least gasoline still costs the same for combustion engine drivers of all ages.)

Younger consumers tend to be renters as well. Unfortunately for those living in faster-growing metros, the rental inventory doesn’t always keep up with the population growth.

Experian

Pandemic-Era Cost Increases Approach 30% in Some Categories

Table showing data on “Impact of inflation since 2019”.

While you might be able to save a few bucks bringing coffee from home, there’s no dodging the increase in housing costs, which now account for a third of a typical consumer’s spending today, according to the Commerce Department.

Other items costing more than a hand-crafted beverage, like car insurance premiums, are also pressuring consumers behind the wheel, especially younger consumers who typically endure higher premiums no matter what vehicle’s being insured.

Methodology: The analysis results provided are based on an Experian-created statistically relevant aggregate sampling of our consumer credit database that may include use of the FICO® Score 8 version. Different sampling parameters may generate different findings compared with other similar analyses. Analyzed credit data did not contain personal identification information. Metro areas group counties and cities into specific geographic areas for population censuses and compilations of related statistical data.

The post Cities where Millennials and Gen Z have the highest credit card debt appeared first on KVIA.

Canva

Trust in telehealth is on the rise: Nearly 3/4 of Gen Z report using a telehealth service

Young woman looking at her laptop.

Tech savvy and away from home, college students are tapping into telehealth services rather than having to rely solely on student health centers. 

Telehealth has become a back-to-school basic for the collegiate set, 71% of whom report using a telehealth service, as compared to 54% of the general population, according to a 2024 study conducted by Hers. 

What’s the result of more college students turning to telehealth? 71% of college students also self-identify as “healthy” as compared to 60% of Americans overall, and 31% report their health is “amazing” (a 5 on a 5-point scale) as compared to 21% of the general population. 

College students were the most likely of any demographic to say their health has changed for the better in the past three years (47% vs. 37% of the general population). 

College students today were in their formative teen years during the pandemic when telehealth services mainstreamed across America (with telemental health care increasing 10x during the pandemic). For many of them, telehealth care is health care, so it makes sense that telehealth services are a natural choice for them when they leave their hometowns, and primary care physicians, to go to school. 

Gen Z Is More Likely to Access Telehealth Services For Mental Health Care

College students are much more likely than the general population to tap into telehealth services for their mental health needs. 66% have gotten a prescription for their mental health from a telehealth company compared to 55% of the general population. 

Furthermore, 68% of college students report being highly emotionally stable as compared to 59% of Americans overall, and 43% report their mental health has improved over the past three years vs. 38% of total respondents.

Research also shows that online mental health interventions, which include web-based self-help, apps, and chatbots, can be effective in managing diverse mental health conditions (e.g., depression, anxiety, stress, and insomnia) among youth.

For Gen Z, a generation known for advocating for mental health awareness, virtual health care as a way to make mental health treatment more accessible and less stigmatizing. Underscoring their interest in mental health, 47% of college students have proactively educated themselves about mental health compared to 35% of Americans overall. They’re talking more about things like anxiety and depression and sharing their experiences on social media.

Weight loss products also rank high on college students’ telehealth lists; 64% have purchased a weight loss product from a telehealth company (maybe a weight loss medication, weight loss injections, or weight loss supplement) vs. 53% of the general population.

And then of course there’s sex. Sexual health is the top health care category students’ are utilizing from telehealth companies. 

College students aren’t the only group leading the telehealth revolution. Time-strapped parents are also telehealth leaders: 69% of working parents reported using telehealth services, compared to 54% of total respondents.

Hers

50 Cities Ranked By Usage of Telehealth Services

Image listing Hers’ top cities using telehealth services in 2024.

Percentage of residents per city who report using telehealth services.

1. Albuquerque, NM, 91% 
2. Omaha, NE, 70%
3. Honolulu, HI, 69%
4. Kansas City, KS, 67% 
5. Little Rock, AR, 66% 
6. San Diego, CA, 66%
7. Providence, RI, 65% 
8. St. Louis, MO, 65% 
9. Baltimore, MD, 64%  
10. New Orleans, LA, 64%
11. Salt Lake City, UT, 64%
12. Memphis, TN, 63%
13. Milwaukee, WI, 63%
14. Austin,TX, 62%
15. Birmingham, AL, 62%
16. Oklahoma City, OK, 62%
17. Norfolk, VA, 61%
18. Raleigh, NC, 59%
19. Sacramento, CA, 59%
20. Indianapolis, IN, 57%
21. Phoenix, AZ, 56%
22. Denver, CO, 56%
23. New Haven, CT, 55%
24. Washington DC, 55%
25. Detroit, MI, 55%
26. Minneapolis, MN, 55%
27. Greenville, SC, 54%
28. Las Vegas, NV, 54%
29. Houston, TX, 53%
30. Seattle, WA, 53%
31. New York, NY, 51%
32. Miami, FL, 51%
33. San Antonio, TX, 51%
34. Orlando, FL, 50%
35. Louisville, KY, 50%
36. San Francisco, CA, 50%
37. Atlanta, GA, 49%
38. Charlotte, NC, 49%
39. Chicago, IL, 49%
40. Boston, MA, 48%
41. Nashville, TN, 48%
42. Tampa, FL, 47%
43. Philadelphia, PA, 45%
44. Dallas, TX, 45%
45. Columbus, OH, 43%
46. Cleveland, OH, 42%
47. Los Angeles, CA, 41%
48. Pittsburgh, PA, 40%
49. Des Moines, IA, 38%
50. Portland, OR, 30%

Data & Methodology

This study is based on a 5,504-person online survey, which included 5,000 18-to-65-year-old respondents in the top 50 metropolitan areas (100 respondents per city) and a nationally representative sample of 504 18-to-65-year-old respondents to contextualize results. The study was fielded in May 2024.

Findings were analyzed by more than 100 demographic and psychographic cuts, including city, region, gender (when we refer to “women” and “men,” we include all people who self-identify as such), age, race and ethnicity, relationship status, parenting status, sexual orientation (heterosexual, bisexual, gay, lesbian, pansexual, asexual, queer, etc.), and political affiliation, among other areas of interest. 

All data in this study are from this source, unless otherwise noted. Independent research firm, Culture Co-op, conducted and analyzed research and findings.

Tips For Making the Most of Telehealth

Whether you’re a Gen Z-er headed back to college or you’re looking to take a page out of their book and give telehealth a try, here are a few tips to make the most of your virtual visits. 

1. Write down your questions ahead of time. Before your appointment, write down any questions you have that you want to make sure you ask your provider to ensure you don’t forget anything in the moment. 
2. Do your research. If you’re interested in prescription weight loss treatments, for example, you might be wondering how to ask your doctor for weight loss pills or Ozempic. If you’re interested in mental health medication, you may want to do some research on anxiety medication or depression medication to familiarize yourself with what’s out there so you can ask your provider more informed questions. 
3. Make sure you know how to log in. Before your appointment, make sure you know where to log in. If it’s a portal and you need to set up an account, do that ahead of time. If there’s an app on your phone, have it downloaded. That way when it comes time for your appointment, you’ll be ready to go and won’t have to worry about any logistics. 
4. Ask about insurance. Many telehealth companies don’t require insurance and offer transparent pricing for care that’s not only more accessible but can also be more affordable, especially for those without insurance. 

The post Trust in telehealth is on the rise: Nearly 3/4 of Gen Z report using a telehealth service appeared first on KVIA.

moveBuddha

Can relocation trends by Americans across state lines swing the 2024 election?

A vibrant collage of different states, each showcasing a photo of what they are famous for.

Will recent moves by Americans across state lines decide this year’s presidency?

After all, just about 13% of Americans relocate yearly, and almost 20% are between states. According to moveBuddha’s calculations, that means roughly 30 million Americans have moved to a new state since the 2020 election.

Spread that across 50 states, and migrations can shift elections.

This happened in the 2020 presidential election when 29% of voters were new to their state voting rolls. Relocation largely went from large urban areas to smaller urban areas in redder states.

What about this year? Looking at moveBuddha’s mover search data collected since the last election, we found which states will experience an internal shake-up due to a tsunami influx of new residents—and how this could impact the upcoming presidential election.

Key Takeaways

• Arizona, Nevada, and Georgia: The battleground swing states. These swing states drawing in new residents to their urban blue islands may be swinging blue in 2024.
• Wisconsin, Michigan, and Pennsylvania: Swing states with stagnating in-moves will not have their 2024 election numbers changed by migration.
• Job growth and strong economies mean red states keep growing and winning electoral seats, but only some will keep their conservative identities.
• Blue states are losing seats and population but getting deeper blue.

Blue Islands Are Key To Tipping Elections

One big way that internal migration could impact the 2024 election is in states where the battle between Democrats and Republicans is already close — and which are growing because new residents are pouring in.

So, which of the nation’s purple states have been hot on movers’ lists since the last election?

Of this year’s battleground states, Nevada, Georgia, and Arizona have been some of the top move-to states of the past 4 years.

Election watchers might wonder if a state’s new residents can sway its political base (and not be swayed by it). The key is “blue islands.”

What’s a blue island? It’s a Democratic pocket in an otherwise Republican area. Large cities are more likely to lean Democratic than their rural counterparts, so the island effect is evident in states that heavily lean red, where Democratic voters cluster in cities like Nashville in Tennessee (where voting districts were split up to eliminate the threat), or Austin in Texas.

To grow, a blue island has to be large enough to support a diverse economy and accommodate new residents, like Atlanta, Las Vegas, and Phoenix. All three are their swing state’s biggest economic hubs. Phoenix alone boasts more than a million more people than the state’s second-largest city, Tucson. Perhaps because of the sheer people-power of their blue islands, these three swing states have seen progressives make state-level inroads since 2012.

moveBuddha

Blue Islands Sway Their States with Jobs and Cheap Housing

A graph chart showing data on the top 10 states with the highest job growth from 2020 to 2024.

States with powerful blue islands share more than simply being left-leaning urban areas in right-leaning states, where progressives have made inroads since 2012. They’re all in the top ten for job growth. That means these positions are likely being filled by newcomers to these cities.

Not coincidentally, Georgia, Nevada, and Arizona are all swing states that were instrumental in deciding the 2020 election. In Georgia, interstate moves to Atlanta were instrumental in shifting the 2020 election to Biden.

Ironically, blue islands might benefit from lax state-level business regulation, which lets them grow into large-scale job magnets for their states. That entices young, educated in-migration. Since both Gen Z and millennials, as well as those with college degrees, are more likely to vote blue. New workers in blue island cities grow a state’s Democratic base.

Movers are flocking to strong economies with affordable housing costs and job opportunities.

moveBuddha

Young Workers Bring Democratic Votes

Chart showing 15 states with the most building permits per capita in 2023.

That means that at the state level, many of the “red” moves are actually trending “green,” as new residents say yes to new financial opportunities and homeownership in up-and-coming cities.

Consider the example of Arizona, a “swing state” thanks to Joe Biden’s narrow victory in the 2020 election. Biden was the state’s first Democratic presidential pick since 1948. Today, Arizona is even more poised to vote blue due to high in-migration from those wowed by its growing economy. Arizona is:

• #10 for GDP growth from Q3 2020 to Q3 2023
• #5 for job growth from Jan 2020 to Jan 2024
• #5 for building permits per capita in 2023

Some analyses also point to “priced-out” Californians and Washingtonians as a reason Arizona has passed recent progressive legislation. Ultimately, where economic prosperity brings young, urban workers pushed out of democratic strongholds by the high cost of living, those young, urban workers bring Democratic votes.

Midwestern Swing States Swing Less

The same swing power doesn’t apply to Midwestern swing states Michigan, Pennsylvania, and Wisconsin. moveBuddha data shows that all three have had more moves exiting their states than moving in since 2020, especially in Michigan and Pennsylvania.

That has resulted in a net loss of electoral seats for Michigan and Pennsylvania following the 2020 census.

Because interstate moves are likely to prioritize jobs, family, and cost of living rather than politics, moving influx favors red states but likely doesn’t supply them with solely red residents.

While a mixed political bag of residents exits these Midwestern swing states, no newcomers arrive, leaving their internal demographics mostly unchanged. That’s down to the economic fates of the Midwest. Housing costs in the lower half of states might attract incoming grads looking to live better on the cheap. But that’s not much use when job creation is also in the bottom half of states. GDP growth is also in the bottom half.

All three states traditionally comprise the “blue wall” where Democrats have dominated politics. Yet all have seen more of their residents embrace populism as the Republican party and Donald Trump win over working-class voters. While they’re still important battleground states in 2024, it’s not because a wall of new residents is changing the game.

moveBuddha

Seeing Red: Moves to Red States Still Going Strong

A creative collage of red U.S. states, each showcasing a photo of what they are famous for.

The states grabbing the most new residents are staunchly red. For moves spanning 2020 to 2024, just 1 blue state appears in the top eight for most in-moves versus out-moves: Maine (20 electoral votes, split).

moveBuddha

Voters Leaving Blue States May Not Be Democrats

Scatter chart showing the “Top Move-In and Move-Out States (2020-2024)”.

Conversely, among the top states for out-moves, the 8 largest losers since 2020 are all blue: California lost the most people compared to in-moves, followed by New Jersey, Illinois, Maryland, Connecticut, Rhode Island, New York, and Massachusetts.

However, research suggests that those deep blue-state goodbyes aren’t necessarily Democrats. Instead, they may be Republican residents self-sorting to locales where they feel they’ll be more welcome.

For instance, movers from Washington to Idaho have overwhelmingly registered to vote as Republicans in their new state, turning the state even more Republican (and making it harder for Republicans in Washington to edge out Democrats in future elections). Further, there are no “blue islands” in Idaho where urban workers find their perfect neighborhood—just three counties in Idaho went blue in the 2020 election, and none include the state’s most populous cities like Boise, Pocatello, or Idaho Falls.

For states like Idaho, the wave of new Republican residents won’t change elections. As the Republican candidate, Donald Trump won Idaho by almost 31% in 2020. Adding to his lead is simply icing on the cake for Republican Idahoans.

Are Red States Holding Onto Their Red Identities Better?

If red states are earning more blue and red residents, why aren’t they turning bluer? There are some reasons:

• Economics is political. Movers seeking a business-friendly environment and low taxes are likely self-sorting into Republican states.
• More voters are registering as Republicans, including movers who are taking on the identities of their new locales, or those simply registering as Republicans so they can have a voice in red-state primaries.
• Republican states tend to be sunbelt states that attract older retirees, who lean more Republican than other demographics, solidifying the state’s existing political leanings.
• Entrenched state cultures are tough to change but easy to join. Newcomers may be adopting their new neighbors’ culture rather than swaying it.

South Carolina, the second-top move-in state from 2020 to 2024, is a prime example. With more than twice the number of people moving in than moving out from 2020 to March 2024, it’s a conservative behemoth that’s only getting bigger, and it has done so while keeping its Republican tilt.

While South Carolina is #2 in in-moves, it may be retaining its Republican identity because it fares a little worse on dimensions of economic growth, suggesting it’s not attracting as many young, urban workers as other states. In fact, there is plenty of evidence it’s attracting a retirement crowd eager to enjoy its beaches and mild weather. And while it’s growing, its GDP growth in the past 4 years has not kept pace with population growth, coming in 18th. Similarly, job growth over the same period lags compared to other top-growth regions at 11th place.

In the end, it may not be simply that a state wins new movers that shift its politics. Political change may be linked more closely to what kinds of movers they attract.

Blue States Lose Electoral Votes But See a Silver Lining

A flip-flop from red to blue would be the end of the story if moves from blue states were all Democrats moving their vote to a new locale. But it’s not an equal trade.

Many young movers are actually Democrats heading to jobs in blue cities in red states. Republicans are also heading to red states. Ditto retirees seeking sunshine, those seeking a safer environment, and those chasing affordability.

Regardless of their political leanings, red states are the big relocation winners, while blue states are attracting a narrower band of newcomers.

Overall, Republicans are losing ground in existing blue states. With an exodus of voters, they may never get it back.

The blue states are staying blue, though losing electoral votes. The attractive economics in top-move cities suggest that red states will gain the electoral votes that blue states are losing…for now, as blue state populations get smaller and older, but don’t draw new residents.

For instance, the top seven states for GDP growth since 2020 are red. 8 have seen positive inflow since 2020, and a clear overlap with top move-in destinations like: Tennessee, Texas, Florida, and Idaho. This suggests movers are moving for opportunities above politics. However, it also means the political tide will favor red states with strong economies.

Tennessee

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 15.8%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.73%

Texas

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 15.8%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.43%

Florida

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 15.7%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.55%

Nebraska

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 12.5%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 0.84%

Idaho

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 11.5%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.79%

Utah

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 11%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1%

Wyoming

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 10.3%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.55%

Maine

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 10.3%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.96%

Nevada

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 10%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.19%

Arizona

• State GDP growth from 2020-2023, 10%
• In-to-out move ratio from 2020-2024, 1.17%

But blue states have a lot to be thankful for. With fewer residents, Democratic-backed policies hoping to spread more resources to more residents will get easier.

Residents in blue states already live longer lives than their red-state counterparts, and that advantage might be attributed to political policies from education to healthcare. So, as red states amass electoral seats at the federal level, state-level Democrats in blue states may see their work gain traction, attracting newcomers in the future. They’re already seeing benefits.

“Red state brain drain” has meant that educated movers are more likely to head for blue states. Applications for academic positions are down in red state universities, for example, and applications for ob-gyn residencies are down in states where abortion has been outlawed.

The impact of highly skilled workers bucking the low-cost migration trend (heading to popular blue-state cities like Olympia, Washington, or Eugene, Oregon) doesn’t make up for the number of lost blue-state electoral votes, but it does bode well for the caliber of services these states might provide and their future well-being, including the inventions they may come to support in new business starts and the health and welfare of their residents.

In 2024, More Swing States Will Be Swinging the Blues

Our 2024 prediction: Deep red states without large cities will continue to get redder, deep blue states will get bluer than ever, and purple states with large job influxes in urban hubs could easily go blue.

Those seeing retirees and sluggish job growth compared to their rate of in-moves? They’re holding on to their red state credentials. 

In the end, changing the politics of a state means changing its demographics, not just its population. And states where Gen Z and millennial workers are making their homes in urban economic centers will have to reckon with changing political tides.

As blue states have found, it’s hard to grow when young people can’t afford to start their lives in your state. And as red states are soon to discover, it’s hard to stay red when your low prices, high job growth, and growing-city vibes are the perfect place for young adults.

The post Can relocation trends by Americans across state lines swing the 2024 election? appeared first on KVIA.

Inside Creative House // Shutterstock

The ultimate guide to debt consolidation

A couple consults with a finance professional while looking at a set of documents.

Debt consolidation is a strategy for managing debt that involves using a new loan, credit card or payment plan to pay off your existing debts. When you consolidate, you’ll roll multiple existing accounts into one new account. Ideally, this will make your finances more manageable.

Prosper explains that debt consolidation can potentially help if you want to reduce the number of your monthly debt payments, secure lower interest rates, reduce the total amount you pay each month, or eliminate creditor fees. Consolidating debt can also help you end a relationship with a bad creditor, assuming you pay off the remaining balance you owe them.

There are multiple products you can use to consolidate your debt, including ​​balance transfer credit cards, personal loans, and home equity loans. For each of these products, you’ll need to qualify based on the creditor’s requirements for your credit history, income, and other factors.

The best types of debt to consolidate 

In particular, debt consolidation is a good strategy when it comes to paying off high-interest accounts like credit cards. That’s because consolidating your debt can potentially move your outstanding balance to a loan with a much lower interest rate.

As of May 2024, the average APR for a credit card is over 21.57%, while a personal loan has an average APR of around 11.92%. 

Types of debt to avoid consolidating

You’ll generally want to avoid consolidating low-interest debt, like mortgages and car loans. These types of loans, which are secured by collateral, usually have relatively low interest rates.  

Additionally, mortgage lenders may offer hardship assistance to borrowers struggling with their mortgage debt.

Debt consolidation isn’t usually beneficial for managing debt with a lot of payment flexibility either, like federal student loans and medical bills.

Most federal student loans are eligible for income-driven repayment plans, sometimes with payments as low as $0. If your student loan isn’t eligible for this type of repayment plan, you might consider consolidating through the Department of Education (more on this below), rather than through a private lender.

With medical bills, you can avoid the need for consolidation by applying for free or discounted charity care, negotiating the bill down to an amount you can afford or setting up an interest-free monthly payment plan.

7 ways to consolidate debt

There are several ways to consolidate debt, but each one has its own benefits and requirements. Here’s a look at Prosper’s top recommendations:

1. Personal loan

Personal loans are sometimes referred to as “debt consolidation loans,” since you can use them for debt consolidation. Whether or not you qualify depends on the lender’s requirements for your credit and income. These loans can be a good option for credit card consolidation since they usually carry much lower interest rates than credit cards. However, rates generally aren’t as low as secured debt, and you may have to pay an application fee or origination fee to the lender.

2. Home equity loan (HELoan) or line of credit (HELOC)

HELoans and HELOCs allow you to tap into your home equity to pay off old debt. But you’ll have to use your home as collateral. According to Senior Assistant Director of Financial Wellness at University of Oregon, Gilbert Rogers, “Home equity loans usually offer a lower interest rate due to the asset backing the loan (your home).” He warns borrowers, however, that “If your finances are unstable then you risk the loss of your home.” Other drawbacks to HELOCs include rising interest rates and loss of home equity. 

3. Reverse mortgage

Similar to home equity loans, a reverse mortgage or home equity conversion mortgage (HECM) lets you cash out some of your home equity. But these loans usually come at a much higher cost than HELoans and HELOCs, and they’re only available to homeowners 62 or older. You don’t have to make monthly payments on a reverse mortgage, but you may have to pay origination fees up to $6,000, plus closing costs and a mortgage insurance premium, and the balance on the loan will increase as interest and fees accrue each month. Then, when you move or pass away, the home will likely have to be sold to pay off the debt. 

4. Direct Consolidation Loan

If you have multiple student loans from the federal government, you might consider applying for a Direct Consolidation Loan through the Department of Education. It can take about six weeks for applications to be processed. If you qualify, you can potentially reduce your monthly payment amount, get into a fixed interest rate, and gain access to an income-driven repayment plan or federal loan forgiveness program, all at no additional cost to you. 

5. Balance transfer credit card

A balance transfer credit card can help you pay down debt more aggressively, since it comes with an introductory 0% APR period—usually for one year or more. Just beware that if the card doesn’t have 0% purchase APR, you’ll be charged interest on your purchases. You’ll likely be charged a 3% to 5% ​​balance transfer fee on the amount you consolidate as well, and the card may have an annual fee. 

6. 401(k) loan

Taking out a 401(k) loan may seem the same as pulling money out of your savings, but it’s far more expensive. Yes, taking money from your 401(k) can help you consolidate debt, but it converts your retirement savings into even more debt. Not only will you have to repay the money, but you may have to pay taxes on the loan, plus a 10% tax on the amount you borrow if you’re under the age of 59.5, and you may have to repay the full loan balance if you lose or leave your job. Plus, you’ll lose out on some of the interest you can earn before retirement. 

7. Borrow from friends or family

Not everyone has a loved one with cash to spare. If you do, it could be worth asking them for a loan to help you consolidate debt. Unlike some other solutions, you won’t have to qualify for the loan based on your credit scores, and you probably won’t be asked to pay interest or any fees. To seal the deal, however, it helps to be direct about when and how you’ll pay the money back. Just like a loan from a business, you may want to put the agreement in writing.

Debt consolidation requirements 

Like with most financing, creditors have different requirements to qualify for their debt consolidation products. But they tend to follow similar guidelines. Here’s what they’re typically looking for: 

Credit scores

When it comes to getting approved for balance transfer credit cards and debt consolidation loans, your credit scores are crucial. “Be mindful of your credit scores because they’re what most lenders use to set your interest rate,” says Jackie Cummings Koski, personal finance educator and consultant.

In general, the higher your score is, the more likely you are to qualify for higher limits on credit cards, or for larger loan amounts, with lower APRs. You can also improve your chances of qualifying for a loan or credit card by applying with a co-signer.

Employment history

Creditors will look at income and employment to determine what you can afford and how much credit you qualify for. For example, you’ll have a better chance of being approved for a loan (whether for debt consolidation or not) if you have a steady source of income that enables you to repay the loan.

Debt and income

Lenders might look at your debt-to-income ratio (DTI), which is calculated by adding up all of your minimum monthly debt payments and dividing that figure by your gross monthly income. You can use this formula to calculate your DTI:

Debt-to-Income (DTI) Formula

       DTI = (Monthly debt payments/Income) x 100

For example, let’s say your minimum monthly debt payments add up to $2,000 and your gross monthly income is $5,000. Your DTI would be calculated like this:

Sample DTI calculation

       Step 1: DTI = ($2,000/$5,000) x 100          

       Step 2: DTI = ($0.40) x 100 

       Step 3: DTI = 40%        

Having a low DTI means you have high income compared to your debt, and therefore you have a better chance of being approved for a loan. Many lenders won’t approve you if your DTI is above 43%, according to Equifax. There’s a chance you may need to find another way to pay down debt, or increase your income, before you can qualify for a loan.

Home equity

For HELoans and HELOCs, your home equity will also come into play. In other words, your home should be worth more than the balance you owe against it. You’re more likely to qualify for one of these products if you’ve paid off at least ​​​​15% to 20% of your home’s value before applying.

Factors to consider when choosing a debt consolidation option

Finding the best debt consolidation option can take some work, especially if you’re looking to bring down your monthly expenses. 

To calculate the cost of debt consolidation and find out if it will truly save you money, you’ll have to compare the following information across lenders and products:

• APR
• Length of repayment
• Cost of interest-only payments (if applicable)
• Lender fees, including origination fee, application fee, closing costs or otherwise
• Credit score requirements
• Minimum and maximum loan amount or credit limit

Don’t worry if consolidating seems overwhelming. It’s just basic math. By carefully comparing the numbers and selecting the appropriate product, consolidating debt could potentially save you thousands of dollars in interest charges and fees.

Here’s an example of how much it could cost to pay off debt, before and after consolidating

Prosper

How to consolidate your debt

Image showing a sample cost of financing before and after consolidation.

If you’re ready to pursue debt consolidation, be sure to proceed with care. By taking these strategic steps to consolidate, you can avoid headaches and maximize your savings:

1. Define your goal

Before you start shopping around, get clear on what you’re hoping to accomplish. “You should always take the time to outline goals for debt consolidation and ensure they’re being achieved through the process (i.e., savings, simplification, etc.),” recommends Rogers.

2. Calculate your debt

Add up the total amount of debt you want to pay off, that way you’ll know how much financing to look for.

3. Review your credit

Pull your free credit reports to see if there are any errors that need to be fixed or other issues that need to be improved. If you have a loan account with Prosper, you can view your FICO score for free. You might also have access to complimentary credit scores through your creditor(s) or through a free credit monitoring program.

4. Research and compare options

Look at different types of creditors to see what they have available. Be sure to include your bank or credit union, since they may offer special incentives to customers. You can easily broaden your search by trying reputable online lenders, too.

5. Get prequalified

Getting prequalified for a loan or credit card can allow you to see a rate quote from a creditor without a hard credit pull, meaning it won’t hurt your credit scores. Ideally, you’ll want to compare three or more prequalification offers to get an idea of what’s available and negotiate the best rates.

6. Apply

Once you’ve honed in on the best offers, submit your applications. Be prepared to provide your contact information, proof of income and details about your debt.

7. Pay your pre-existing debt

Once you receive your new credit card or loan, you’ll need to pay off your old debt accounts. You may have to pay them off yourself, or you can coordinate with the new creditor to send payments on your behalf.

8. Start payments on the new account

Make a note of the due date and minimum payment required for your new account, so you can work them into your budget and stay current on the payments.

Pros and cons of debt consolidation

The benefits of debt consolidation aren’t always clear-cut, says Rogers. “Credit cards and loans are both available as debt consolidation tools, but they each come with pros and cons. For example, anytime there is an offer to consolidate debt through a loan or credit card, there will be a fee.”

Fortunately, if you choose to consolidate your debt carefully, you’re likely to experience more of these pros than cons:

Pros

• Savings: Consolidating into a lower APR can save you money on interest and other finance charges.
• Fewer payments: When you use debt consolidation to pay off multiple accounts, you roll all of the payments into one and have fewer accounts to monitor and manage.
• Improve your credit: Consolidating can help you pay off debt faster, accelerating growth in your credit scores.
• Spread out payments: Consolidation can also allow you to extend the length of your debt repayment, bringing down your total monthly payment amount and helping you balance your budget.
• Avoid debt settlement: Consolidating debt can help you avoid predatory alternatives like for-profit debt settlement, which can put you at risk of everything from tanking your credit to facing legal issues, without even lowering your overall debt.

Cons

• Financing fees: Depending on the product, you may have to pay an origination fee, a balance transfer fee, closing costs, an annual fee, or other costs associated with the new financing.
• Credit requirements: Your eligibility for debt consolidation products may depend on your credit scores. Poor credit can be a roadblock.
• Prepayment penalties: Some of your current creditors may charge you a fee if you pay off your debt before the scheduled payoff date.
• Payments could increase: If you consolidate credit card debt into a loan, your monthly debt payments could increase since, unlike credit cards, loans have a set payoff date.
• Initial hit to your credit: Your credit scores may drop by a few points when you apply for a new loan or credit card, and they may drop even more if you open or close accounts due to debt consolidation.

Managing your debt after consolidation

It’s tempting to see debt consolidation as a final solution for financial problems, but keep in mind that consolidating debt won’t automatically make it go away. If you want to be debt free once-and-for-all, you may need a new approach to ​​financial planning.

“The biggest mistake individuals make when consolidating debt is sticking to bad habits. Anytime you make a significant change in your financial situation you should sit down and reassess your habits,” Rogers suggests.

Here are some new habits to help you effectively manage your debt and move past your bills.

1. Update your budget

Consolidation can change your monthly expenses. If consolidation decreased your monthly expenses and as a result you have extra cash, consider putting some of that money toward paying off your new loan early. If consolidation increased your monthly expenses, make sure to adjust other items in your budget immediately.

2. Avoid new debt

Consider additional actions that can help you get out of the debt loop, like eliminating non-necessities for a few months or even longer. “My best tip for getting out of debt after consolidating is to establish a repayment plan that requires you to say ‘no’ to some of your current habits,” says Rogers. Try things like canceling subscriptions, deleting your credit card information from retail accounts and asking a friend or family member to help hold you accountable.

3. Keep introductory periods in mind

If you open a balance transfer credit card, don’t forget that the 0% APR period will eventually expire. If you don’t have a plan for paying off the balance at that time, your monthly payments and interest charges could skyrocket.

4. Use the debt avalanche

You can save money on debt payments and build positive momentum by using the debt avalanche method. With this method, you’ll use any surplus cash you have to pay extra toward your highest interest debt. Once that account is paid off, you’ll roll the funds over to the next highest debt until all of your debts are eliminated.

5. Increase payments when possible

If your income increases, or you get a bonus or a tax refund, use the extra money to increase your debt payment and not your spending.

6. Schedule a payoff date

Calculate your debt payoff date based on your new payment schedule. Then add the date to your calendar. If you hit your goal ahead of schedule, great!

7. Track your progress

Check in on your debt balances regularly, and be sure to acknowledge when things are moving in the right direction. “Monitor your progress and celebrate the milestones along the way,” suggests Cummings Koski. “Beyond your finances, think about how you feel as you’re conquering your goal of getting out of debt,” she says. Rogers suggests setting goals and, as you achieve them, setting new ones. “This will help you remain on the path to paying off debt,” he says.

8. Start an emergency fund

Lay the foundation for a debt-free future by setting money aside for emergencies on a regular basis, even if it’s just $25 per paycheck. “This emergency fund could help you out of a bind and possibly help you avoid taking on additional debt,” says Cummings Koski.

Is debt consolidation right for you?

For some people who are struggling with debt, debt consolidation can be a great tool. That’s because consolidation is a strategy that can speed up your journey to becoming debt free, whether by reducing interest charges, eliminating financing fees or lowering your overall monthly bill payments.

But debt consolidation isn’t right for everyone. To consolidate, you’ll need to qualify for either a new balance transfer credit card, a loan, or a debt management plan based on factors like your credit scores. Even if you qualify, however, there’s no automatic guarantee that consolidating is the best solution.

As Rogers points out, no one has to navigate this stressful and confusing situation alone. Whether you’re completely overwhelmed with debt, or you just need a few quick tips, a certified credit counselor can offer professional guidance on the options that make sense for you.

Ultimately, you’ll need good financial habits to help you get out of debt and avoid getting back into it in the future. Rogers says that, regardless of whether or not you consolidate, you’ll need to cut back on expenses and outline your specific goals and targets for paying off debt if you really want to improve your finances.

The post The ultimate guide to debt consolidation appeared first on KVIA.

Drazen Zigic // Shutterstock

Inflation, wages and credit: Are younger consumers winning in 2024?

A young woman carefully selecting items to purchase in a grocery aisle.

Since 2022, the costs consumers bear have risen significantly. This is the case not only for consumer goods including food and shelter, but for interest payments on their debts as well. Nonetheless, consumer credit markets remain healthy, according to an Experian analysis of data from the second quarter (Q2) of 2024.

With unemployment still near a historic low, more consumers have the income to service their monthly credit card and auto payments, higher though they may be, in 2024. And although delinquencies on some types of credit have increased, Experian data shows they are not far off record-low levels. Both of these factors undergird the rise in the average consumer credit score, even though consumer confidence indicators suggest that some consumers have felt sour on the economy for some time.

Experian

Interest and Card Balances Growing Faster Than Wages and Inflation

Line graph chart showing data on “Annual Change in Wages, Inflation and Credit Card Balances”.

With lower unemployment rates, workers are asking for and receiving increases in wages, reversing a trend that’s persisted over more than a decade. And, for the first time since the Great Recession, wages have been growing faster than inflation.

However, hovering over both inflation and wages are credit card balances, which have only recently begun to moderate from double-digit percentage increases over much of the past two years. As of June 2024, credit card balances were still increasing by a nearly 12% annual rate, dwarfing the increases in both wages and inflation.

Although some of that spending may be pent-up demand (vacations that were deferred during the pandemic, for instance), some increases in credit card spending could equally be due to higher costs. Price hikes for large, nondiscretionary components of the consumer basket of goods, such as rent and auto insurance, have left less cash available for consumer discretionary spending—so out comes the plastic.

Experian

Younger Workers Getting More, Spending (Somewhat) Less

Line graph chart showing data on “Annual Wage Growth by Age Group”.

According to Federal Reserve Bank of Atlanta data, younger and lower-paid workers may be benefiting the most from recent wage gains. Workers 16 to 24 have been earning wage increases of more than 10% annually for much of the past two years, and still earned 9% more in 2024. Meanwhile, prices have only increased 3% over the past year (through June 2024).

Older workers over the same period also earned more than inflation over the same period, but only around about half the increase of younger workers.

Although not all younger workers are lower-paid, many are. And while on an individual level they may not feel their earnings power growing, the way these consumers are collectively spending suggests that those earnings gains are being spent. Compared to other generations, however, young consumers appear to be showing some restraint—when you compare their balances to their credit limits, at least. Meanwhile, their FICO Scores remain relatively constant.

Experian

Gen Z Credit Utilization Rates Lower Than Other Generations

Table showing data on “Change in Average Credit Card Balance, Credit Limit and FICO® Scores, 2023-2024”.

Among the generations, Generation Z adults 18 to 27 in 2024, were the only ones to not grow their average balance more than their credit limits. In other words, while all other generations are using more of their credit and growing their credit utilization, Gen Zers are using less of their credit than they were a year ago, in percentage terms.

Nonetheless, even though Gen Zers are receiving a greater percentage of credit than they’re currently using, they still have far lower credit limits. The average credit limit for Gen Z consumers was $13,900 in Q2 2024, less than half of the $29,200 average credit limit of millennials. These lower limits also mean potentially less room for error: A $3,000 doom spending spree or car repair may cost the same in dollar terms for every consumer, but impacts those with lower credit limits more.

Experian

Slowly but Surely, Gen Z Is Gaining Experience With Credit

A graph showing data on “Percentage of Consumers With Each Debt Type by Year”.

As Gen Z ages, these consumers have been increasingly taking on more types of debt besides revolving credit card debt. The percentage of Gen Zers with personal loans, auto loans and even mortgages has grown substantially in 2024.

In other words, while younger workers may be receiving larger raises, there is likely new borrowing that will quickly absorb that extra income, if not in mortgages (or rent for that matter) but also other bigger-ticket items like auto loans, which, depending on where in the country you are, can be more difficult to avoid as adult responsibilities increase.

Methodology: The analysis results provided are based on an Experian-created statistically relevant aggregate sampling of our consumer credit database that may include use of the FICO Score 8 version. Different sampling parameters may generate different findings compared with other similar analyses. Analyzed credit data did not contain personal identification information. Metro areas group counties and cities into specific geographic areas for population censuses and compilations of related statistical data.

The post Inflation, wages and credit: Are younger consumers winning in 2024? appeared first on KVIA.

Canva

Facing ‘critical’ staff shortages, nurses in these states work the most hours at long-term care facilities

A nurse holding an elderly man’s hand on his cane.

Unlike hospital and outpatient care settings, where staffing has returned to or surpassed levels seen prior to the COVID-19 pandemic, nursing home staffing continues to experience shortages. A quarter of all nursing homes in the United States in recent years reported “critical” staff shortages amid growing demand from an aging population for long-term health care.

To better explore the working conditions of registered nurses in nursing homes, Vivian Health examined payroll data compiled by the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services to see where RNs in long-term care facilities work the longest shifts. The data represents the average daily hours worked during the first three months of 2024, the latest data available.

Workforce capacity in nursing homes, already in decline before COVID-19, was further exacerbated by the pandemic, according to the 2023 “National Healthcare Quality and Disparities Report” from the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality. Surges of various COVID-19 variants, including Alpha, Delta, and Omicron, coincided with worsening staff shortages. That crisis has only deepened: There were 8.4% fewer nursing and residential care workers employed in January 2023 than in January 2020, according to the AHRQ.

Factors outside COVID also contribute to critical staffing shortages in long-term care facilities. Burnout among nursing home care workers plays a key role in driving staffing challenges. Occupational hazards, long working shifts, exposure to violence, low salaries, and high workloads have all been shown to correlate with high levels of burnout among long-term care facility nurses.

When nurses experiencing burnout opt for less stressful health care settings, staffing shortages grow—along with the responsibilities of remaining nursing home workers. In this vicious cycle, nearly half of new nurses report working overtime, and more than 1 in 10 nurses reported holding a second job. Newly licensed nurses, like experienced nurses, predominantly work 12-hour shifts, plus voluntary and mandatory overtime. Newly licensed nurses are also more likely to be scheduled for less desirable time slots, such as night shifts.

The combination of long shifts, holding multiple jobs, and working undesirable hours can accelerate burnout for early career nurses working in nursing homes: a dangerous outcome for an already limited workforce.

Vivian Health

RNs in Alaska and Utah work the longest shifts

A map showing the average number of hours registered nurses worked in nursing homes in 2024.

Workplace data from the Centers for Medicare & Medicaid Services shows that nurses working in Alaska, Utah, Nevada, Montana, and Kentucky average the longest shifts among nurses in the United States.

Alaska, where nurses work an average of 11.9-hour shifts, faces a severe nursing shortage. There are more than 1,500 reported registered nurse vacancies, a figure expected to exceed 5,000 vacancies by 2030. A new bill signed into law in July 2024 seeks to address the nursing shortage in Alaska, citing long waits for nursing licensure that deter people from pursuing a nursing career or renewing their licenses.

Utah’s nursing shortage—nurses here work 11.77 hours per shift on average—is additionally impacted by an aging nursing population: Almost 1 in 5 Utah nurses is approaching retirement age. States that have large rural areas, such as Nevada, Montana, and Kentucky, also face significant challenges in part due to an uneven distribution of workers concentrated in urban and metropolitan areas.

Long work shifts and staffing shortages can lead to burnout, distress, and illness among nurses—but they also tend to lower the quality of care patients receive. Nurses working longer shifts may experience increased fatigue, which can lead to errors that impact patient safety and experience. Staffing shortages have even been associated with increases in patient mortality rates.

New staffing requirements issued in April 2024 aim to address overburdened worker schedules and staff shortages, but most nursing homes are not currently equipped to meet the new standards. The American Health Care Association notes that 4 out of 5 nursing homes cannot meet the requirement to have nurses on staff 24/7. When all new requirements are combined, just 6% of operating long-term care facilities can currently achieve them.

With these challenges, nursing homes are limiting admissions and are concerned about closures. AHCA reports that 66% of long-term care facilities are concerned that if workforce challenges persist, they may have to permanently close. This prospect could be devastating for thousands of residents, families, and staff.

Story editing by Nicole Caldwell. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns. 

This story originally appeared on Vivian Health and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Facing 'critical' staff shortages, nurses in these states work the most hours at long-term care facilities appeared first on KVIA.

Photo illustration by Michael Flocker // Stacker // Getty Images

Beyond blokecore: Why the intersection of football and fashion is more than a fad

Photo cut outs of six adults in blokecore fashion against a grayscale background of a New York City street.

Old-school soccer jerseys, bucket hats, tracksuits, and, most often, Adidas Sambas. Welcome to yet another core trend at the top of your FYP on TikTok: blokecore. Borrowing from the British colloquial term “bloke,” meaning “guy,” “man,” or “friends,” the fashion trend is built around turning football kits (“soccer uniforms” for those of us on the other side of the Atlantic) into everyday wear. It’s British football fan culture with a fashionable flair. Best of all, it’s comfort wrapped up in style. The RealReal explores the blokecore trend, how to wear it, and the hidden histories that preceded it, with help from Vogue, Vice, and Refinery29.

Blokecore has seemingly modern roots. American TikTok creator Brandon Huntley helped popularize the term in 2021 when a friend wrote “bloke” under one of his posts as a joke. The term, and the fashion sensibility, spread from there.

“Everyone’s got their Adidas shorts on, the jerseys are everywhere,” Texan-raised, London-based stylist Katelyn Cutbirth told Stacker. “I mean, it’s absolutely taking over.” Fashion brands like Etro and Venezia are getting into the action by incorporating football elements into their collections. Streetwear names like Supreme and Kith have also leaned into the trend if their drops are any indication.

One notable name in fashion has certainly done his part in pushing blokecore’s popularity: iconoclast designer Demna, who brought the Eastern European aesthetic of his youth as a Georgian refugee to high fashion. His aesthetic often resulted in unusual pairings, sometimes pairing sports with evening attire. It was less of a fashion statement and more visual evidence of geopolitical trauma.

The creative director of couture powerhouse Balenciaga since 2015, Demna revealed designs for a fictional Balenciaga Football Club, including jerseys, puffer jackets, and football shoes in 2020.

“Footballers and priests were what I grew up with in Georgia,” Demna told British Vogue after the show. Years later, in 2024, football continues to inspire the designer with a limited-edition line of jerseys and track pants emblazoned with the Balenciaga logo in neon yellow, pink, and bright white. With Balenciaga and other fashion lines fanning the blokecore flame, football club fortunes have followed.

The RealReal

Revenues for European soccer kits rise

Bar chart showing the top European football clubs that make the most money from kit and merchandising sales in 2023. FC Barcelona and Real Madrid lead followed by FC Bayern Munich and then Liverpool.

Blokecore, as a trend, has resulted in a financial windfall for many of the world’s top soccer clubs or teams. Firms like FC Barcelona and FC Bayern Munich have retailed almost $200 million and $160 million in team attire sales alone. In Europe, kits are big business.

Revenues from merchandising are now 60% above 2019 levels, according to the Union of European Football Associations, which governs professional European football. In 2022 (the latest available data), the top 20 clubs generated about 1.2 billion euros in kit and merchandising sales.

The most popular teams based on kit and merchandising sales also happen to be the clubs that earn the most revenue with the addition of well-supported teams. 

Real Madrid (#2 on the list of top earners in kit and merchandising) placed first in total revenues in 2023 at 841 million euros. Manchester United placed fifth when it came to kit and merchandising revenue, as well as total revenue with 747 million euros in revenue for 2023. FC Barcelona, the top earner in kit and merchandising sales, came in third by total revenue with 815 million euros. 

Christian Vierig // Getty Images

Blokecore’s erased traditions

A person, seen only from the shoulders down, wears yellow Balenciaga bag with accessories, football jersey outside.

Blokecore feels fresh and new, yet like many things in fashion, its roots go further back than most imagine. One can see threads of this trend when looking at the clothes of popular culture from the early aughts. At that time, fashion was consumed by trucker hats, expensive, logo-defined designer bags, low-rise cut pants, and a sweaty-but-chic sensibility. (Think Christina Aguilera’s “Dirrty” era.) Generation Z, young children back then, are now young adults revisiting those early looks of their youth like every generation has done.

“It’s this new mixture of using [soccer] jerseys and the same [Adidas] Sambas and the football shorts, but then mixing it with hyper-feminine, coquette-style [elements]. So girls will wear a little peasant top or a peasant skirt or a mini skirt or like their ballet flats, but with the soccer jerseys and stuff. It’s really cute,” Cutbirth told Stacker. “Girls will wear bows in their hair or Mary Janes and a cute little mini bag. I think that’s kind of how you can elevate it as well. Because you’ll wear a little Prada bag, but with the jersey and the Adidas shorts. It’s kind of high-low dressing.”

Though Demna was able to polish this trend and present it on the runway, blokecore is a style that sits firmly with the working class. In British culture, the bloke is an everyman who sits in a pub with a drink in hand, cheering his team on. Predictably, this unaffected character is what many trendsetters try to evoke whenever they pair their kits with the latest kicks.

Team pride doesn’t just exist in European countries, however. “Throughout Latin America, the Caribbean, and Latine U.S.A, Latines are always representing where they’re from—in and outside of their respective homelands—through sports jerseys. For decades, Black and Latina women have stylized fútbol, baseball, basketball, and hockey jerseys, turning our ‘hoods into fashion and identity statements,” Refinery29 writer Ashley Garcia Lezcano explained.

Lezcano further makes the case for renaming the trend “block-core,” which references the urban dwellings (like New York City, Los Angeles, and Orlando) where this trend was alive and well before its official codification.

British blokes have long used soccer as an element of dress. But it is also true that the bubbling Black and Latine cultures in cities across North and South America have concurrently used soccer motifs as a tool of daily dress and expression that shouldn’t be buried under the Eurocentric term “bloke.”

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on The RealReal and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Beyond blokecore: Why the intersection of football and fashion is more than a fad appeared first on KVIA.

F01 PHOTO // Shutterstock

The most common types of car crashes in America

Two men standing by car crash with red emergency triangle on road.

Screech. Boom. Crash! In today’s fast-paced world, car crashes feel like simply a fact of life. In 1913, before cars dominated the roads, there were only 1.3 million vehicles registered and 4,200 deaths associated with them, according to the National Safety Council. Fast-forward more than a century to 2022, when the latest data is available, and registered vehicles have soared to 283 million, with 46,027 people dying and 5.2 million getting injured on the road.

The General analyzed National Highway Traffic Safety Administration data to determine the most common types of car crashes in the United States.

According to the NHTSA, there were nearly 6 million car crashes reported in the United States based on its most recent data from 2022. The NHTSA’s annual Crash Report Sampling System analyzes police-reported vehicle accidents from across the country and breaks them down into categories based on the type of collision and whether the collision resulted in property damage, injury, or death.

Fortunately, the incidence of fatal crashes per 100,000 people dropped 2% between 2021 and 2022, but that decrease comes on the heels of a sharp 11% increase from 2020 to 2021 when motorists returned to the road after COVID-19. These traffic accidents cost the economy about $340 billion in lost productivity, medical, and legal costs over this period.

States have made some progress in combatting crashes by aggressively enforcing traffic laws under programs such as Click It or Ticket (which encourages wearing seat belts) and installing improved road markings and signage. Automakers have also done their part by incorporating technology along the lines of collision detection and blind-spot monitoring into vehicles. Despite these advances, driving is still one of the most dangerous activities Americans perform on a daily basis.

The General

The most common collisions

A bar chart showing the number of car crashes by type, including single-vehicle crashes, as well as rear-end, head-on, angle, sideswipe, and other collisions.

Most people likely consider car crashes the product of two or more vehicles in motion colliding. However, NHTSA data showed that single-vehicle crashes were the most common type of collisions, accounting for approximately 1.8 million reported cases. These involve a single vehicle in motion colliding with pedestrians, animals in the roadways, or stationary objects, including parked or immobile vehicles. They also include crashes where a single vehicle mistakenly veers off the road or rolls over.

The second most common collisions were rear-end crashes, wherein one vehicle strikes another from behind, accounting for almost 1.7 million reported accidents. They often occur when the vehicles involved are slowing down, such as when approaching traffic lights, stop signs, or heavy traffic.

Angled collisions were slightly less common, accounting for approximately 1.3 million crashes. These crashes occur when one vehicle’s front strikes another’s side at or near a right angle and are often informally referred to as T-bone collisions. Sideswipes, where the sides of two vehicles strike each other, accounted for fewer collisions, while head-on collisions were among the least common.

Accidents of all kinds can be prevented by practicing regular driving safety: maintaining proper speed, allowing ample distance between you and the car ahead, and taking road and weather conditions into account. Even if no other vehicles are on the road, drivers must still keep an eye out for animals and pedestrians, along with objects that might present collision hazards.

Backup cameras, collision detection, and other advanced safety technologies are becoming standards on many modern vehicles and can also assist in avoiding collisions. Lastly, drivers must minimize distractions such as using smartphones or even eating a quick to-go meal while behind the wheel.

The General

A vast majority of fatal crashes involve a single driver

A split bar chart showing the share of fatal and non-fatal car crashes of each collision type. 60% of fatal crashes were single-driver crashes, while non-fatal crashes were more evenly split among single-vehicle, rear-end, and angle collisions.

Traffic crashes accounted for 42,514 deaths in 2022, a mortality rate of 12.8 per 100,000 people, according to the Federal Highway Administration. This number was 716 deaths lower than the previous year, but it is still high compared to the 39,007 deaths in 2020 and the 36,355 deaths in 2019.

Apart from being the most common type of crash, single-vehicle accidents were the most fatal, accounting for 3 out of every 5 deaths. This is a stark contrast to rear-end collisions, which almost matched single-vehicle crashes in overall number but only accounted for 7% of fatal incidents. Between vehicles in motion, angled collisions accounted for 18% of all fatal crashes. Head-on collisions were low in number but highly lethal, accounting for 11% of fatal crashes.

A good portion of these crashes occurred in the evenings, especially on the weekends, according to the National Safety Council’s analysis of NHTSA’s data. These times are often when there may be fewer vehicles on the road but sudden changes in the roadway and hazards are less visible. These are also the times when drivers are most susceptible to exhaustion, drugs or alcohol, distraction, and colliding with unseen objects.

Since 2020, there has also been an increased number of crashes involving large trucks, with the majority of fatalities being occupants in other vehicles besides the trucks. These fatal collisions can occur even when the truck is parked. Regulations in the trucking industry limit the number of hours truck drivers can operate their vehicle, but face a shortage of overnight parking venues. As a result, more truck drivers are pulling off onto road and highway shoulders for rest periods and sleep. Unfortunately, these dark hours are when large trucks parked on the side of the road present the greatest hazard to other drivers.

Caution and due regard are the best preventative measures drivers can exercise to stay safe on the roads and avoid all kinds of crashes. As Georgia’s Department of Transportation says, “Drive alert. Arrive alive.”

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns.

This story originally appeared on The General and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post The most common types of car crashes in America appeared first on KVIA.

Photo Illustration by Michael Flocker // Stacker // Getty Images

What happens in Vegas: 15 of the best films set in Sin City

A montage of Sharon Stone in “Casino,” Warren Beatty in “Bugsy” and Johny Depp in “Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas.”

Hollywood may be the entertainment capital of the world, but not many places are as entertaining as Las Vegas. Sin City lives up to its name with 24-hour casinos, bars galore, and a dubious slogan: “What happens in Vegas, stays in Vegas.” Pair all that with bright lights, glitz, and glamour—not to mention the close proximity to Los Angeles—and it’s no wonder so many movies are set in Las Vegas.

Though the town was founded in 1905, it wasn’t until El Rancho Vegas opened in 1941 and set a precedent for today’s luxury hotel-casinos that Las Vegas was born. Right on the famed Strip, El Rancho Vegas featured air conditioning, a swimming pool, and a showroom. By the ’50s and ’60s, casinos started popping up, and a new era in Las Vegas history was born.

The ’60s brought an entertainment boom to Las Vegas, with both live acts and films set in Sin City, starting with the Rat Pack and the 1960 original “Ocean’s 11.” The suave group, consisting of Frank Sinatra, Dean Martin, and Sammy Davis Jr., focused on the city’s glamor and entertainment appeal. In the following decades, the cinematic focus shifted to casinos that epitomized high stakes and excess, represented in films like the Oscar-winning “Rain Man” and iconic “Casino.”

As Vegas continues to evolve, so does how it’s portrayed on film. The 2001 “Ocean’s Eleven” remake shows the sleek side of modern Vegas, while 2009’s “The Hangover” gave audiences an exaggerated look at the debauchery Vegas has come to be known for.

Sqore dove into film history to find every film set in Las Vegas and compiled a list of 15 of the best that take place in Sin City. You might be surprised not to see certain movies on the list, like the original “Ocean’s 11” or the 1997 comedy classic “Vegas Vacation.” Still, to qualify for this list, the film had to be primarily set in Vegas, have at least 1,000 IMDb user votes, and at least a 6.5 user rating or 70 Metascore.

Read on to learn more about the 15 best films set in Las Vegas.

Columbia/TriStar // Getty Images

Go (1999)

Jay Mohr and Scott Wolf in a scene from “Go.”

– Director: Doug Liman
– IMDb user rating: 7.2
– Metascore: 74
– Runtime: 1 hour, 42 minutes

The plot of “Go” revolves around the aftermath of a drug deal, following three different sets of characters and viewpoints. The dark comedy, often compared to “Pulp Fiction,” bounces between timelines, including one set in Las Vegas. In Sin City, we see drug dealer Simon Baines (Desmond Askew) get into a bit of debauchery with a pair of bridesmaids and set a hotel room on fire. The movie was filmed at the Riviera Hotel and Casino and New Frontier Hotel and Casino, neither of which still stand today.

Universal Studios/Courtesy of Getty Images

The Night Stalker (1972)

Darren McGavin and Carol Lynley in a scene from “The Noight Stalker.”

– Director: John Llewellyn Moxey
– IMDb user rating: 7.4
– Metascore: data not available
– Runtime: 1 hour, 14 minutes

“The Night Stalker” follows a Las Vegas news reporter investigating murders committed by a vampire. The made-for-TV movie is set in Vegas, but only exterior shots of the city were used. The rest of it was filmed in studios.

Universal Pictures // Getty Images

Casino (1995)

Sharon Stone and Robert Deniro in a scene from “Casino.”

– Director: Martin Scorsese
– IMDb user rating: 8.2
– Metascore: 73
– Runtime: 2 hours, 58 minutes

With a name like “Casino,” it’s no surprise that Martin Scorsese’s 1995 classic was filmed entirely on location in Las Vegas. The movie follows a casino executive and a mafioso, two best friends competing for a gambling empire. The movie was shot at several hotels, casinos, and restaurants throughout Sin City.

TriStar Pictures // Getty Images

Bugsy (1991)

Warren Beatty and Annette Bening is a scene from “Bugsy.”

– Director: Barry Levinson
– IMDb user rating: 6.8
– Metascore: 80
– Runtime: 2 hours, 16 minutes

This movie’s namesake, Benjamin “Bugsy” Siegel, is notorious—as the man who built Las Vegas, but interestingly enough, none of “Bugsy” was actually filmed in the desert city. The story is set in the 1940s and revolves around the construction of the famous Flamingo Las Vegas Hotel & Casino. However, because it’s a period piece, the film crew had to build a replica of the original building in the Southern California desert since the actual Flamingo looked much different in 1991 than when it first opened.

Nancy Moran/Sygma via Getty Images

One from the Heart (1981)

A dance scene being filmed on the set of “One from the Heart.”

– Director: Francis Ford Coppola
– IMDb user rating: 6.5
– Metascore: 57
– Runtime: 1 hour, 47 minutes

When Francis Ford Coppola set out to make “One from the Heart,” he wanted the story of dreamers taking a chance on love to be as bold and grandiose as possible. As a result, the movie wasn’t actually filmed in Las Vegas at all. Instead, the director insisted on building a full, flashy set on a soundstage.

Lumiere Pictures

Leaving Las Vegas (1995)

Elisabeth Shue and Nicolas Cage as seen in the “Leaving Las Vegas” movie poster.

– Director: Mike Figgis
– IMDb user rating: 7.5
– Metascore: 82
– Runtime: 1 hour, 51 minutes

When Ben Sanderson (Nicolas Cage) loses everything and decides to drink himself to death in Las Vegas, the stage is set for this cult classic. Although the exterior shots are of the famed Las Vegas Strip, the casino interiors were actually filmed 90 miles south in Laughlin, Nevada, widely known as a “Mini Vegas.” Laughlin has small-scale versions of famous Sin City hotels and casinos; “Leaving Las Vegas” was actually filed at the Gold River Casino and Resort (now the Laughlin River Lodge Hotel & Casino).

The Geffen Company

Lost in America (1985)

The movie poster for “Lost in America.”

– Director: Albert Brooks
– IMDb user rating: 7
– Metascore: 78
– Runtime: 1 hour, 31 minutes

“Lost in America” tells the story of a husband and wife who quit their jobs and leave responsibility behind to travel the country in a Winnebago. Though it takes place throughout the United States, one of its most famous scenes occurs at a Vegas hotel. Linda Howard (Julie Hagerty) loses most of the nest egg she and her husband, David Howard (Albert Brooks), saved for their adventure on roulette at the Desert Inn. Everything filmed at the Vegas hotel was shot on location, including the casino, lobby, and coffee shop. The Desert Inn ended up closing in 2000, and the Wynn & Encore Resorts now take their place on the Strip.

Universal // Getty Images

Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas (1998)

Johnny Depp and Benicio Del Toro in a scene from “Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas.”

– Director: Terry Gilliam
– IMDb user rating: 7.5
– Metascore: 41
– Runtime: 1 hour, 58 minutes

Before “Fear and Loathing in Las Vegas” was a movie about Hunter S. Thompson’s drug-fueled road trip from Los Angeles to Nevada, it was a novel, and after reading that novel, the famed Circus Circus casino not only refused to let the film crew shoot on location but didn’t even want their name to be mentioned. Instead, Raoul Duke (Johnny Depp) and Dr. Gonzo (Benicio Del Toro) go to a fictional casino called Bazooko Circus that was shot in the now-imploded Stardust and Riviera hotels. The Flamingo did let the crew shoot on-site, which resulted in a hilarious scene where the drug-addled duo trash Gonzo’s hotel suite.

Chris Hyde // Getty Images

Elvis (2022)

Austin Butler, Olivia DeJonge, Baz Luhrmann and Tom Hanks attend a screening of “Elvis” in 2022.

– Director: Baz Luhrmann
– IMDb user rating: 7.3
– Metascore: 64
– Runtime: 2 hours, 39 minutes

Elvis is essential to Las Vegas—the famed singer had a residency at the International Hotel for several years, and Elvis impersonators are still popular on the Strip —but none of the Vegas scenes in the 2022 biopic were filmed on-site. In fact, the entire movie was filmed in Queensland, Australia, because of COVID-19 restrictions and tax credits.

Department of Motion Pictures . XTR

Bloody Nose, Empty Pockets (2020)

The movie poster for Bloody Nose, Empty Pockets

– Directors: Bill Ross IV, Turner Ross
– IMDb user rating: 7.2
– Metascore: 83
– Runtime: 1 hour, 38 minutes

“Bloody Nose, Empty Pockets” plays like a documentary about the last night of a seedy dive bar in Vegas called The Roaring 20s, only it’s not actually a documentary, and it wasn’t filmed in Vegas. There is one thing real about the docu-realist film, though: the customers. Except for one professional actor, everyone is a real patron of the bar (an actual bar called The Roaring 20s in New Orleans that’s still doing business). The patrons were consuming real alcoholic drinks (and apparently acid) while filming.

Gareth Cattermole // Getty Images

Behind the Candelabra (2013)

Screenwriter Richard LaGravenese, Michael Douglas, producer Greg Jacobs, director Steven Soderbergh, producer Jerry Weintraub and Matt Damon attend the ‘Behind The Candelabra’ premiere.

– Director: Steven Soderbergh
– IMDb user rating: 7
– Metascore: data not available
– Runtime: 1 hour, 58 minutes

“Behind the Candelabra” tells the complex love story of Liberace (Michael Douglas) and Scott Thorson (Matt Damon). Much of the movie occurs in the megastar’s homes in Las Vegas; Palm Springs, California; and Los Angeles. However, even though the late entertainer’s abandoned Vegas home is still intact the production team chose to film in Los Angeles. The infamous adult bookstore scene was also filmed in Los Angeles, not Vegas, but the show scenes were filmed at LVH (formerly the Las Vegas Hilton), where Liberace performed frequently in the 1970s.

Ullstein bild via Getty Images

The Lady Gambles (1949)

Barbara Stanwyck in a scene from “The Lady Gambles.”

– Director: Michael Gordon
– IMDb user rating: 6.6
– Metascore: data not available
– Runtime: 1 hour, 39 minutes

“The Lady Gambles” offers a brutally realistic depiction of gambling addiction. Joan Boothe (Barbara Stanwyck) transforms from a reporter trying to catch a story in Las Vegas to a gambler who gets beaten for rigging dice in an alley. Filmed in Vegas as well as other parts of Nevada and California, the movie accurately depicts her addiction as an illness rather than a weakness.

Universal History Archive/UIG via Getty images

Rain Man (1988)

The movie poster for “Rain Man.”

– Director: Barry Levinson
– IMDb user rating: 8
– Metascore: 65
– Runtime: 2 hours, 13 minutes

There are a lot of memorable scenes in Barry Levinson’s Oscar-winning “Rain Man.” Still, one standout is when Charlie Babbitt (Tom Cruise) brings his autistic-savant brother, Raymond Babbitt (Dustin Hoffman), to Las Vegas after realizing his unique ability to count cards. The scheme works at the blackjack table, and the brothers win big. The iconic casino scene was filmed on location at Caesars Palace.

Dave Benett/Getty Images

Ocean’s Eleven (2001)

Matt Damon, Brad Pitt, George Clooney and Andy Garcia attend a screening of “Ocean’s Eleven.”

– Director: Steven Soderbergh
– IMDb user rating: 7.7
– Metascore: 74
– Runtime: 1 hour, 56 minutes

Steven Soderbergh’s remake of the 1960s Rat Pack classic “Ocean’s 11” follows gangster Danny Ocean’s (George Clooney) elaborate plot to rob three Las Vegas casinos simultaneously: the Bellagio, the Mirage, and MGM Grand. The properties, all owned by Terry Benedict (Andy Garcia), share an underground vault; however, only the Bellagio was used for filming.

Dave Hogan // Getty Images

The Hangover (2009)

Bradley Cooper, director Todd Phillips, Justin Bartha, Ed Helms and Zach Galifianakis attend a screening of ‘The Hangover.”

– Director: Todd Phillips
– IMDb user rating: 7.7
– Metascore: 73
– Runtime: 1 hour, 40 minutes

“The Hangover” is a hilarious account of everything that could go wrong during a bachelor party in Vegas. Four friends begin the night at Caesars Palace; then, the morning after, the groom is missing, and no one remembers what happened the night before. The movie was filmed in the Caesars Palace lobby, corridors, and rooftop, but the trashed villa was actually created on a soundstage in Burbank, California.

Story editing by Alizah Salario. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Paris Close. Photo selection by Michael Flocker.

This story originally appeared on Sqore and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post What happens in Vegas: 15 of the best films set in Sin City appeared first on KVIA.

PeopleImages.com – Yuri A // Shutterstock

Why it’s so difficult to diagnose ADHD in adults

A woman falling asleep in a class.

The COVID-19 pandemic wreaked havoc on more than just our physical health. It revealed (and contributed to) a nation struggling with its mental health—and seeking treatment for it. The first and second years of the pandemic, 2020 and 2021, saw significant growth in the number of American adults receiving help with their mental health, according to data from the CDC.

While more Americans than before sought assistance with anxiety and depression during the pandemic, diagnoses of attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder were on the rise, too. In 2022, roughly 1 million more children than in 2016 received an ADHD diagnosis. Prescriptions for ADHD medication also surged during the pandemic, especially for women and young adults.

ADHD Advisor investigated the age, gender, racial, and wealth disparities in ADHD diagnoses and why diagnosing and treating is more difficult in adults, using data from the CDC, medical studies, and news reports.

The rise in ADHD diagnoses and treatment during the pandemic has been attributed to various circumstances created by lockdowns. As work and school moved into the home, time on electronic devices like computers, tablets, and smartphones increased, and both children and adults faced the need to self-motivate and organize, making ADHD symptoms more evident and leading many to seek treatment. Yet even with this jump in diagnoses, disparities in ADHD diagnoses and treatment persist for adults, particularly women, Black and brown people, and people with lower incomes.

While ADHD is among the most common psychiatric disorders in adults, most physicians and even many psychiatrists don’t undergo training on the disorder, psychiatrist and ADHD specialist Dr. William Dodson told ADDitude. Adding to the confusion around adult ADHD is a total lack of diagnostic and treatment guidelines for adults in the U.S.

Prostock-studio // Shutterstock

ADHD diagnoses and treatment are rife with disparities—and this has consequences

A woman consoling a man.

Age disparities in ADHD diagnoses have gained attention in recent years, particularly as myths of ADHD as a “disorder of childhood” have been debunked by further research. Studies have shown that the vast majority of children with ADHD diagnoses experience symptoms as adults also. Meanwhile, many adults receive their first diagnosis as adults, not children. Adult symptoms can be missed or misconstrued as a result of presenting differently than children’s symptoms, being mistaken for other mental health issues, or lack of provider knowledge.

The underdiagnosis of girls and women with ADHD has also received more public awareness. In childhood, boys and girls are diagnosed with ADHD at a ratio of 4 to 1, according to a 2019 study published in Psychiatric Genetics. Much of this gender disparity has been attributed to the differing ways the disorder presents between girls and boys. While younger boys with ADHD tend to exhibit symptoms like impulsiveness and hyperactivity, young girls with ADHD often experience more internalized symptoms, such as disorganization and forgetfulness. Research has shown that because symptoms associated with boys are more hypervisible and disruptive, they receive more frequent interventions and diagnoses.

In addition to age and gender disparities, racial and ethnic disparities persist in diagnosing ADHD. Multiple studies published over the past decade have shown that African American, Asian, and Latino children are underdiagnosed and receive less treatment than white children. One of these studies, published in Pediatrics in 2013, suggested clinicians are more receptive to white parents seeking treatment for their children than to parents of other races and ethnicities and recommended that health care providers provide “culturally sensitive monitoring.”

Another barrier to equitable diagnoses and treatment of ADHD is access to health care. Allison Gornik and Rod Salgado, Ph.D., state that families with more financial, insurance, and education resources have an easier time accessing support for the disorder. A lack of these resources limits access to quality health care providers, medication coverage, and other important services. At the same time, young people coming from lower-income backgrounds are often misdiagnosed with ADHD due to a conflation of ADHD symptoms and other behavioral issues linked with food or housing insecurity or exposure to trauma.

The implications of disparities in ADHD diagnoses can be far-reaching. Untreated ADHD can make succeeding in school, work, and even relationships more difficult. It can also impact mental health; children whose ADHD goes untreated often also suffer from low self-esteem or depression. Systemic racism and sexism that Black, Indigenous, and Latino people, and people from low-income backgrounds experience create obstacles to success in school, work, and other areas of life. Undiagnosed or untreated ADHD can compound these issues.

Part of the cultural increase in awareness about ADHD, particularly among young people, has come from the rise of content creators posting informative videos on social media platforms like TikTok. Many users have shared videos in which they talk about their personal experiences with the disorder.

According to an article from the BBC, videos with the hashtag ADHD have been viewed over 20 billion times as of May 2023. Critics of this trend argue these videos are often inaccurate or misleading and can lead to potentially incorrect self-diagnosis by viewers, as well as to the perpetuation of stereotypes. At the same time, an increase in awareness has normalized the disorder, chipping away at decades-old stigma and allowing for a sense of community and understanding for those with ADHD.

Story editing by Shannon Luders-Manuel. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Janina Lawrence.

This story originally appeared on ADHD Advisor and was produced and distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Why it's so difficult to diagnose ADHD in adults appeared first on KVIA.

Justine Lynn Photo // Shutterstock

Swinging success: The explosive growth of indoor golf

Golf ball on tee at simulator.

It’s no secret that golf has earned a reputation as an elitist sport, synonymous with a certain higher social and economic status. The “gentleman’s game” is expensive to play with its costly equipment, apparel, and green fees. It is also a big time commitment, especially for those living in major cities where transportation and inflated prices can make playing a whole-day affair.

But over the last several years, the sport has become more accessible thanks to its versatility as an increasingly indoor activity. In the years since the COVID-19 pandemic, new golf simulator technology and companies have saturated the market, allowing golfers the chance to turn their homes and offices into personal driving ranges and enjoy virtual rounds of golf around the world in the comfort of their backyard, basement, or local watering hole.

According to the National Golf Foundation, about 6.2 million Americans hit golf balls using a simulator during the past year, a 73% increase compared to pre-pandemic levels, when simulator usage plateaued under 4 million. With successful franchises such as Five Iron and X-Golf continuing to expand (not to mention sprouting commercial indoor miniature golf companies, such as Swingers and Puttery) and cheaper options for home simulators, more and more players are golfing wherever it suits them best.

To further trace the sport’s recent evolution, PrimePutt mapped the rapid growth of indoor golf and its ramifications on the golf industry.

SergeyAbramov // Shutterstock

New technology is making indoor golf more affordable and accessible

A girl playing on a golf simulator.

There are numerous benefits to indoor golf, starting with accessibility. Instead of shelling out for clubs and competing for tee times (catering to a wealthier population of participants), not to mention the time-consuming hassle of getting to the course, golfers can book condensed swing sessions at local, often urban facilities for a potentially cheaper and easier option. The individualized setups provide instant swing feedback and metrics, allow for year-round play, and can be less intimidating for beginners (who might feel uncomfortable on a public course).

Why the sudden wave of interest in this activity? One of the biggest reasons is the evolving simulator and launch monitor technology. The competitive marketplace has lowered prices considerably, which have influenced many golfers to invest in their own off-course options. A basic setup with a golf swing monitor, mat, and net can now be purchased for around $1,000. In a consumer survey shared by the National Golf Foundation, 1 in 3 participants said they’ve used a simulator in a person’s home.

That growth has also led to a proliferation of indoor companies (there are now more than 1,600 businesses with a simulator) aiming to make golf a more approachable social activity by putting food, entertainment, and a gamifying spin on its stuffier stereotypes while still offering golf instruction and fittings to cater to more avid golfers. According to NGF, more than half of indoor golf customers don’t even play traditional greens, only highlighting the way the sport is trending toward more casual players.

“One of the main reasons people come to the Five Iron is because it’s peaceful and an oasis. It lends itself to an introvert who just wants a safe space and an urban environment,” Jared Solomon, CEO and co-founder of Five Iron, told Stacker. “But if you want to socialize and not pay a million dollars, it’s a pretty good place, too.”

NMK-Studio // Shutterstock

Indoor golf is advancing diversity in the game

Golf player playing golf indoors on golf simulator closeup.

In a recent report by agriculture company Syngenta and research firm Ipsos, which examined 16.1 million social media posts within the U.S. and the U.K. between 2019 and 2022, researchers found that golf is mostly talked about by white men and that the game’s lack of representation makes people of color feel less welcome. But with the recent growth of indoor golf as a more accessible and entertaining option, those stereotypes and stigmas are starting to change.

NGF research shows that in 2023, 32.9 million customers aged 6 years and older played off-course golf, up 18% from 2022, and echoes the demographic mix of the U.S. population “exhibiting a younger and more diverse representation (age, gender, race, and ethnicity) than the on-course population.” In addition, there are 23% more women and girls playing golf on a course since 2018, while the number of Asian, Black, and Hispanic golfers has increased substantially by 43%, no doubt fueled by the increased opportunities to try the game in cheaper and more accessible settings.

Meanwhile, of the 3 million-plus green grass golfers who have used simulators, their interest in the traditional game has only strengthened. Only 2% of indoor golfers said their simulated golf time cut into their time playing on an actual course, compared to 29% who said they play more, citing improvements in their own playing and equipment knowledge as reasons. An estimated 2.5 million golfers credit off-course golf experiences for getting them into the game.

But this is only the beginning. The golf simulator market is expected to reach $3.38 billion by the end of 2030, according to Straits Research. Solomon attributes most of that to one primary reason. “It feels really good when you hit a good ball,” he says. “I think the more people that get an opportunity to hit their first shot and get that shot euphoria, the more popular that the sport’s going to get.”

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Tim Bruns. 

This story originally appeared on PrimePutt and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Swinging success: The explosive growth of indoor golf appeared first on KVIA.

Stokkete // Shutterstock

From added sugar to sodium, here’s how US dietary recommendations have changed over the last 50 years

A person reading a food label in a supermarket.

More than 30 million school-aged children’s menus will change in fall 2025 to reflect the latest dietary guidelines recommended by the U.S. government. Their new fare will limit added sugars in cereals and yogurts—increasingly over time—and reduce sodium in school breakfasts by 10% and lunches by 15% starting July 1, 2027.

“Like teachers, classrooms, books, and computers, nutritious school meals are an essential part of the school environment, and when we raise the bar for school meals, it empowers our kids to achieve greater success inside and outside of the classroom,” Agriculture Secretary Tom Vilsack said in a statement announcing the change.

The government didn’t make these changes willy-nilly. The Department of Agriculture’s latest bid to make school lunches healthier was shaped by the ever-evolving Dietary Guidelines for Americans, a document published every five years by the departments of Agriculture and Health and Human Services after careful consideration by the nongovernmental advisory panel. These influence the diets of 1 in 4 Americans who eat from the menus in schools, prisons, military bases, and other federal food programs. The two agencies have collaborated on guidelines since 1980. The next update is due in 2025.

Before these guidelines evolve yet again, Northwell Health partnered with Stacker to see how U.S. dietary guidelines have changed—and if they’ve stood the test of time—using historical documents, academic research, and news articles.

Minerva Studio // Shutterstock

Nutritional nudges encourage more evidence and less fad diets

A person shopping in a supermarket.

The guidelines were established for good reason: A cacophony of conversation around fad diets and what’s healthy left Americans confused about what information to believe when they’re in the grocery aisle.

Long before the public was captivated by social media influencers offering tips and advice on nutrition and savvy marketing campaigns by food manufacturers themselves—nutritional campaigns like the food wheel of the ’80s and the food guide pyramid of the ’90s helped ordinary people perceive the healthiness of food.

Over time, the guidelines have become stricter and more detailed, while its authors try to make them more accessible for the average person. They no longer recommend specific nutrients but rather try to take a holistic view of the food and beverages, knowing people often consume the same ones again and again over many meals.

Despite shifting approaches over the decades, what’s stayed the same is the constant debate and varying opinions among experts. Though guidelines have been available for decades, Americans’ diets still don’t get a passing grade. “It’s pretty self evident that the guidelines have done nothing to prevent our country’s epidemics of obesity and diabetes,” Nina Teicholz, executive director of the Nutrition Coalition, told The New York Times.

Andrey_Popov // Shutterstock

1980: Avoid sugar and high-fat foods

A finger pointing to the smallest sugar cube in a line of sugar cubes.

The early days of the guidelines left much up for interpretation: “Avoid too much sugar…Avoid too much fat, saturated fat, and cholesterol,” without giving Americans a yardstick of how much “too much” was. The 1980 guidelines say the health hazard inherent in excessively eating sugar is tooth decay, and disputes it causes diabetes, heart attacks, or blood vessel diseases.

While a diet with excess sugar doesn’t directly cause these conditions, we now know it increases the risk of obesity, according to a review of scientific literature focused on Americans published in a 2019 issue of the Polish Journal of Food and Nutrition Sciences. Research published in BMC Medicine in 2023 found that more sugar also led to higher incidents of cardiovascular disease and stroke, while an umbrella review of meta-analyses published in 2023 in the British Medical Journal reported it could increase the risk of Type 2 diabetes and some cancers.

In 2020, the guidance limits added sugars and saturated fats to a maximum of 10% of one’s daily calorie intake starting at age 2—a change carried over from the 1990 edition.

In Green // Shutterstock

1985: Eat foods high in starch and fiber

A bag of potatoes on the conveyor belt at the supermarket check out.

In 1985, Americans were encouraged to maintain a “desirable weight” rather than the “ideal” one promoted in 1980. Foods high in starch, like bread, dry beans, peas, and potatoes, were highlighted over sugars as being healthy sources of nutrients. It also promoted consuming carbs for those looking to lose weight because it had about half the calories of fats.

Starchy foods can contribute to weight loss and better health, but we now know not all are created equal. A 2024 study in Nature Metabolism noted that naturally occurring “resistant starch,” which the body can’t convert to energy and thus passes through and out of the digestive system, is proven to improve the body’s sensitivity to insulin and curb weight. It can be found in foods like oats, whole grains, and legumes.

ME Image // Shutterstock

1990: Balance food intake with physical activity

Two people eating salad at a gym.

The 1990 nutrition guidelines were the first to directly address weight by sharing the latest research on the impacts of where body fat is stored and its links to health risks while also addressing excessive thinness.

Balancing food intake with physical activity became more apparent with the passing of the Nutrition Labeling and Education Act in 1990, implemented in 1994. It required nearly all packaged and processed foods to show their ingredients and how their portions make up someone’s daily calories. This helped Americans navigate which nutrients were and weren’t found in their foods.

USDA/Corbis via Getty Images

1995: Follow the food pyramid

USDA Food Guide Pyramid.

In the era of waif models appearing on TV, the nutrition guidelines focused more on recommending food items instead of particular nutrients. They became more precise with the introduction of the food guide pyramid graphic. Five food groups comprise the pyramid and make up a daily healthy diet, with grains as the foundation. The guidelines suggested 6 to 11 servings a day, followed by other food groups in lesser portions: vegetables (3 to 5 servings), fruits (2 to 4 servings), dairy (2 to 3 servings), meat and beans (2 to 3 servings).

The pyramid became widely known, but based on today’s nutritional science, promoting high-carbohydrate servings and offering low-level guidance on which types of meat, dairy, and fats to choose made the popular food pyramid somewhat of a passing phenomenon.

These evolutions in eating recommendations still did little to clarify what is healthy. In a 1996 survey by the major contributor to the nutrition guidelines, the USDA, over 40% of meal planners and planners strongly agreed that “there are so many different recommendations about healthy ways to eat, it’s hard to know what to believe.”

Vladislav Noseek // Shutterstock

2000: Eat whole grains

Whole grain rye bread on wooden board.

Once again, the 2000 dietary guidelines shifted Americans’ perceptions of food. The biggest portion of the food pyramid now came with the new recommendation to especially eat “whole” grains” rather than “refined grains.” Whole grains like brown rice, whole oats, bulgur, and pearl barley provide more fiber and nutrients than nonwhole grains. Eating whole grains is also a strategy to feel fuller with lower calories, according to the guidelines.

The 2020 recommendations highlighted the benefits of whole-grain foods, which have been shown to improve overall health and affect obesity, diabetes, and cardiovascular diseases. This research is encapsulated in a 2022 quantitative analysis of writings on whole grains published in the Foods journal.

Ekaterina_Minaeva // Shutterstock

2005: Eat 2,000 calories a day

Close up of calories on a nutrition label calories with a pen.

Finally, in 2005, Americans were given an average caloric yardstick of 2,000 daily calories consumed to help make healthier choices and simplify understanding nutrition labels. The guideline’s footnotes note that the 2,000-calorie food guide is only appropriate for sedentary males 51-70 years old and sedentary females aged 19-30 years old. The guide also tailored offers for people by gender, age, and activity level.

The nuanced language and approach in 2005’s guidelines reflected the advisory committee’s more formal, systematic approach, which catered to policymakers, health care professionals, and nutritionists rather than the general public.

Though they thought that by appealing to nutrition professionals, their message would trickle down to the public, there were still gaps in communication. The 2,000-calorie guideline has been criticized for being a one-size-fits-all solution that could actually lead to weight gain.

BONDART PHOTOGRAPHY // Shutterstock

2010: Limit trans fats

Nutritionist holding meal plan in front of a table full of healthy foods.

In 2010, a year after a new classification system was proposed to categorize foods by how much they have been processed, the guidelines recommended keeping trans fatty acids (which are formed during food processing) as low as possible to decrease the risk of chronic disease. These guidelines went to lengths to describe the various types of fats, including trans fats that are usually solid at room temperature.

Trans fats are still considered to be the worst type of fat, increasing the risk of heart disease by increasing “bad” cholesterol. The World Health Organization has called for a global, total ban on industrially produced trans fats by 2025, noting that the substance is responsible for premature deaths of up to 500,000 people due to coronary disease.

monticello // Shutterstock

2015: Consider a Mediterranean diet

Selection of foods from a Mediterranean diet.

In 2015, the guidance prompted Americans to consider eating like a person in a Mediterranean country. This edition moved away from a focus on individual food groups and nutrients and instead shifted the emphasis on eating patterns or the combination of foods consumers typically eat. In addition to the U.S.-style pattern based on the USDA food patterns presented in the 2010 edition, the agencies added two other examples: the Mediterranean-style diet and vegetarian versions, which are meant to give Americans examples of healthy eating styles based on personal and cultural preferences.

The Mediterranean diet includes more fruits and seafood and less dairy than the average U.S. diet. It’s still considered to be a healthy diet with its links to reducing heart disease and cancer, according to a study in the Mayo Clinic Proceedings published in 2023 and an examination of “Blue Zones”—parts of the world where people live longer and healthier lives—published in a 2024 issue of the Endocrine, Metabolic & Immune Disorders – Drug Targets journal.

Rawpixel.com // Shutterstock

2020: Try the MyPlate Plan

A father and toddler-aged son preparing a healthy meal.

The introduction of the MyPlate Plan in 2020 aimed to help Americans identify foods that fit their lifestyles and life stages while being high in nutrients and weeding out those with tokenistic

amounts of nutrition.

The guidelines recommend limiting or avoiding added sugars, saturated fats, and sodium. Aside from the recommendations for what to exclude, most of the guidance hones in on what to add to diets. It also acknowledges that dietary patterns should shift with age and budget.

The latest guidelines in 2020—a year the world was in the throes of the COVID-19 pandemic—did not come without controversy, however. Critics raised concerns about the fact that more than half of panel members had ties to the food industry. Others noted that questions about red meat and salt consumption were omitted. There were also no planned discussions of sustainability due to complaints from the livestock industry.

Despite these issues, health professionals continue to advocate for simpler maxims—ones that people could actually remember and put into practice. New York University nutrition expert Marion Nestle, who served on the 1995 advisory panel, told The New York Times, “In my view, the advice is the same: Eat your vegetables, don’t gain too much weight, and avoid junk foods with a lot of salt, sugar, and saturated fat.”

Story editing by Carren Jao. Additional research by Elena Cox. Additional editing by Kelly Glass. Copy editing by Kristen Wegrzyn.

This story originally appeared on Northwell Health and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post From added sugar to sodium, here's how US dietary recommendations have changed over the last 50 years appeared first on KVIA.

moveBuddha

Hottest family-friendly cities in the US that offer safe neighborhoods, affordable housing, good schools

A triptych graphic illustration shows a house on the left, a child with a backpack walking with an adult in the center, and stacked moving boxes with a teddy bear on the right.

Hollywood has long had a vision of what a great American town looks like. From “It’s a Wonderful Life” to “Pleasantville,” the cities emblazoned in our minds as nurturing spots to settle down and raise families all have a triad of things in common: single-family homes, low crime, and great schools.

With the median home price creeping to $420,000 this spring, more Americans are wondering where they can get a slice of that dream, so moveBuddha crunched the numbers to see where it’s still in reach.

moveBuddha looked for American cities where people want to move that also have a median home price under the national median, with A- or B-grade crime rates and schools. In total, 16 cities meet that criteria. If you’re looking for that ideal combination of affordable homes, safe streets, and educational excellence, consider these all-American towns. And who knows? Your new digs may even come with a block party and a picket fence.

Big Takeaways:

• Broken Arrow, OK, with a median home price of $275,192, is the lowest-priced town in America where you’ll find low crime and great schools.
• 15 of the 16 cities are in the South. The only outlier? That’s Ankeny, IA.
• With 4 cities on the list, Texas proves it can keep home costs and crime low and still help local kids become a future Aggie or Longhorn. 3 are near Houston.
• New Braunfels, TX, and Clayton, NC, are the most popular — both have more than 2 in-moves for every exit.
• 2 cities get an A+ for education: #6 Edmond, OK, and #7 Katy, TX.

moveBuddha

Family-friendly cities people are moving to this year, with homes under $420k

Map showing data on 16 affordable family-friendly cities people are moving to in 2024.

With housing up 60% over the past ten years, even when adjusting for inflation, fewer Americans can hope to achieve the so-called American dream. In fact, a recent analysis of real estate prices found that just 15.5% of homes for sale were affordable to the average American household, and the average age of a first-time home-buyer has risen from 29 in 1981 to 36 today. Where are young families (and families-to-be) to go? 

Starting with a list of the 188 most desired cities to move to in 2024, all with 1.25 new residents searching to move in for every one who wants to leave, moveBuddha uncovered the places in America people want to move to right now.

From there, median home cost (Zillow), crime and education scores (Niche) were analyzed. Only 16 total cities had top crime and school scores coupled with below-median home prices.

Southern destinations dominate 2024’s affordable family-friendly cities

Broken Arrow, OK, finishes first overall, with a low median home price 42% less than the national median. Homes in Tulsa’s star suburb cost more than homes in the city itself, but you’ll get A-grade schools in a large district with more clubs and sports than other areas and a nationally recognized marching band.

Other top cities with the lowest home prices are #2 Huntsville, AL, and #3 Orange Park, FL.

Though Broken Arrow’s B- crime score feels low, 13 of the 16 winning cities score B-, and just three make it into B-territory, making A-grade safety unattainable at this price point everywhere in America.

Overall, 15 of the top 16 cities are located in the South. While Texas boasts four of the affordable cities, Florida takes three, and Alabama, Georgia, and Oklahoma are home to two apiece. There’s a single outlier: Ankeny, IA.

#8 New Braunfels, TX, and #10 Clayton, NC, are the most popular move-to destinations. However, if home supply doesn’t keep pace with demand, they could be erased from the winner’s list in future years. In both cities, more than two people move in for every move-out.

Want the best schools overall? There are two A+ schools on the list: #6 Edmond, OK, and #7 Katy, TX. With median home costs in the mid-$300K range, it will cost new residents roughly 23% more than #1 Broken Arrow to hit the books here.

The 16 most affordable family-friendly cities

1. Broken Arrow, OK

Median home price: $275,192
In-to-out move ratio: 1.88
Population (2023 est): 119,194
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A- 

Just outside of Tulsa, Broken Arrow, OK, has the lowest median home price on the list. The school district offers full-day pre-K, so parents won’t just save on daycare—they’ll also prime their kids to enter kindergarten in a town that’s catching the attention of “best places” lists with its revitalized Rose District, complete with murals, eateries, and a local performing arts center.

2. Huntsville, AL

Median home price: $281,657
In-to-out move ratio: 1.33
Population (2023 est): 225,564
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: B+ 

It seems like the space race is still landing tons of young families in this affordable, safe town. Rocket City is known for its aerospace industry, but it’s earning accolades for its low housing costs. Its vibrant downtown, with its genteel Big Spring Park, eclectic Lowe Mill ARTS & Entertainment, and an antebellum historic district, is capped by views of majestic Monte Sano Mountain.

3. Orange Park, FL

Median home price: $326,261
In-to-out move ratio: 1.54
Population (2023 est): 9,064
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A 

A serene riverfront beauty in southwest Jacksonville, Orange Park offers a small-town vibe with grade-A schools and the third-lowest housing median in the field. Commune with neighbors at fairs like the annual Fall Festival, and when you’re itching for a big-city experience, you’ll find it right over the bridge in Jacksonville.

4. Daphne, AL

Median home price: $328,215
In-to-out move ratio: 1.54
Population (2023 est): 30,321
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A 

Across Mobile Bay from lower Alabama’s urban hub, “Jubilee City” is a ~27,000-resident town that houses one of the Eastern Shore’s two international baccalaureate programs in its Blue Ribbon school. All that in a town with bayside boardwalks and drop-dead sunsets.

5. Ankeny, IA

Median home price: $333,385
In-to-out move ratio: 1.35
Population (2023 est): 74,458
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A 

This Iowa enclave has sprouted a bustling Uptown with quaint breweries and boutiques, as well as a popular walkable development where housing, coffee, and the gym are all clustered in one liveable neighborhood. Like Daphne, AL, Ankeny is a Blue Ribbon school (one of just five in Iowa), and bonus: it’s just down the road from Des Moines.

6. Edmond, OK

Median home price: $343,655
In-to-out move ratio: 1.42
Population (2023 est): 98,103
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A+

Oklahoma’s North Side heavy-hitter is the list’s first A+ school district, known for its high graduation rates and multiple high schools ranked among the best in the country. Edmond itself isn’t slacking, either: It’s ranked the #1 place to live in Oklahoma, and has some of the city’s chicest restaurants so you won’t have to make the trek downtown.

7. Katy, TX

Median home price: $353,735
In-to-out move ratio: 1.76
Population (2023 est): 26,360
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A+ 

Start home shopping in the other A+ school district city on the list, and find the best district in Houston along with a city dedicated to making things easy for families: Let the kids blow off some steam at Katy’s huge indoor slide park, water park, and the free mini-golf course at Mary Jo Peckham Park. Add the shopping districts full of “pocket parks,” and you can’t help but notice how Katy’s setting kids up for success.

8. New Braunfels, TX

Median home price: $361,958
In-to-out move ratio: 2.67
Population (2023 est): 110,958
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A-

No other city on the list has such a high move-in rate: For every 2.67 people who move to New Braunfels, just one moves out. That means that the city’s affordable housing price is precarious (it has already risen 34% in the city over the past five years). Maybe it’s so popular because you can tube, kayak, and fish in the Comal and Guadalupe rivers or slip and cool down at one of the country’s biggest waterparks. Just don’t expect its prices or small-town charm to last.

9. Simpsonville, SC

Median home price: $366,320
In-to-out move ratio: 1.36
Population (2023 est): 27,506
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A-

South of popular Greenville, Simpsonville is in South Carolina’s verdant upstate, with high schools in South Carolina’s top 10% coupled with home prices 28% lower than the national average. You’ll get more space and a bigger yard for your money than in Greenville, but in 2023’s most moved-to state, you’ll contend with housing prices that have risen 51% over the past five years.

10. Clayton, NC

Median home price: $372,892
In-to-out move ratio: 2.03
Population (2023 est): 30,216
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: B+

One of Raleigh’s hottest towns, Clayton, is attracting new residents with its charming downtown and low real estate costs compared to other Research Triangle cities. The trade-off is a commute; Clayton’s new housing can be a 30-minute drive to jobs in Raleigh, so the cozy enclave retains an aura of small-town safety. Additionally, the school district, serving all of Johnson County, makes up almost half of the most improving North Carolina schools.

11. Vero Beach, FL

Median home price: $379,317
In-to-out move ratio: 1.36
Population (2023 est): 17,317
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A-

Florida’s Treasure Coast is home to one of its own treasures: a town that’s been voted one of the “100 Best Art Towns in America,” but with some of its most affordable real estate in a growing location with great schools and safe streets. Its cool Spanish-style arts and entertainment district has independent shops and restaurants. With a limited job market and an untenable commute to either Fort Lauderdale or Orlando, Vero Beach is living its best beach lifestyle and keeping it affordable.

12. Montgomery, TX

Median home price: $389,571
In-to-out move ratio: 1.51
Population (2023 est): 2,769
Crime & Safety Score: B
Public Schools Score: A

If it weren’t for the price, this town of ~50,000 residents may be the list’s overall winner. One of only three B-grade safety cities on the list, it edges out the other contenders while maintaining an “A” in education, all in a historical stagecoach town near Lake Conroe where police are responsive, and half of residents say they feel “very safe.”

13. Richmond, TX

Median home price: $391,874
In-to-out move ratio: 1.61
Population (2023 est): 12,816
Crime & Safety Score: B
Public Schools Score: B+ 

The Houston area’s third contribution to the list, Richmond is a diverse city with ranching roots, a community farm, and the space to grow — fast. Richmond’s housing prices have shot up 48% since 2019, and the county is expected to double its population by 2050. The schools are keeping up, with Foster High School in the top 5% of schools in Texas.

14. Punta Gorda, FL

Median home price: $406,095
In-to-out move ratio: 1.84
Population (2023 est): 20,227
Crime & Safety Score: B
Public Schools Score: A-

Port Charlotte’s growing urban area includes popular Punta Gorda, famous for its network of canals and a paradise for boaters. It must be a paradise for many other people, too: Real estate prices have jumped 63% since 2019. Buy a home here before those prices rise more, and you’ll be rewarded with one of three top “B” safety grades on the list of affordable cities.

15. Kennesaw, GA

Median home price: $414,820
In-to-out move ratio: 1.35
Population (2023 est): 34,683
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A

You’ll find a rich Civil War history and an even richer park system in this northwest suburb of Atlanta with one of the largest and best school districts in the state — its schools boast STEM, arts, and other diverse programs. And while you’re living in the second most expensive city on the list, Atlanta salaries make the costs comparable: the average salary in Atlanta is $56,297, while in #1 Broken Arrow, that figure is $42,219.

16. Acworth, GA

Median home price: $418,511
In-to-out move ratio: 1.72
Population (2023 est): 22,379
Crime & Safety Score: B-
Public Schools Score: A- 

Just beyond Kennesaw, on the shores of Lake Acworth, you’ll find another town vying for the area title of safest affordable enclave with great schools. “The Lake City” is a charming railroad town capitalizing on real estate prices coming just below the national median.

Conclusion

Ultimately, safe, affordable towns with great schools are rare.

Only 16 of these hidden treasures in the entire US are on the radar of Americans looking to move. Others may be scattered across the nation, but remain hidden family-safe havens for local residents.

And with so much overlap between towns on the list and the country’s most popular move-to states, young families shouldn’t expect supply to keep pace with demand for long. After all, these cities check three huge boxes for new movers. As each town is discovered, its affordability wanes, and the reasonable home prices that now define it are threatened. Soon, there may be no safe, affordable towns with great schools at all.

So, if a classic American town is what you’re looking for, ignore the line of moving trucks behind you, pre-order your picket fence, and snag a home in a city on this elite list while you still can.

Methodology

moveBuddha started with the latest mover data from its Moving Cost Calculator, capturing user searches made at any time from Jan. 1 through June 28, 2024.

The list was limited to cities with at least 1.25 new residents moving in for every one that leaves, and with 25 or more searches for both moves in and out.

That left 188 of this year’s most desirable move-to cities.

From there, the cities were analyzed for:

Affordability: Using median home cost in May 2024 (Zillow)
Safety & Crime: Using the Niche grade for each city, and only including cities with A or B (Niche)
Public School: Using the Niche grade, and only including cities with scores of A or B (Niche)

To highlight the most affordable cities, the list was limited to cities offering median homes less than $420,000. This was based on a recent NAR report finding that the U.S. median home sales have reached a record high of $419,000.

Only 16 cities had top crime and school scores coupled with below-median home prices.

Population data is sourced from the US Census 2023 annual estimates.

The post Hottest family-friendly cities in the US that offer safe neighborhoods, affordable housing, good schools appeared first on KVIA.

Nicoleta Ionescu // Shutterstock

Data shows that vacations can cause stress

Person on the phone at airport gate, showing signs of frustration covering face with hand while sitting with luggage.

Vacations are, in theory, a break from the daily grind — a chance to unwind, explore new places and recharge mentally and physically. In practice, though, vacations can also bring about stressors and even take an unexpected toll on mental health. 

Research shows that planning a trip, traveling to your destination, and being on vacation elicit stress for many travelers. According to a 2012 national study, the most stressful part of vacation for many people is planning, especially for those traveling internationally with a spouse or relative. For first-time travelers and younger adults, though, the study found higher rates of stress during the vacation itself. While vacations are meant to be relaxing, this research highlights how they are sometimes sources of anxiety rather than an escape from it. 

However, taking time off has some well-documented mental health benefits, with most working Americans reporting that vacations positively affect well-being. In its 2018 survey of over 1,500 working adults, the American Psychological Association (APA) found that most people (57 percent) return to work from vacation feeling more motivated and less stressed. Also, about two out of three return from vacation feeling more positive (68 percent) and with more energy (66 percent). An earlier survey of a similar size found that vacation was associated with better well-being and lower levels of depression (as measured by the Pittsburgh Enjoyable Activities Test). Notably, the results of this survey remained significant even after adjusting for demographics. 

To assess how vacations affect mental health — for better and for worse — Charlie Health looked at the numbers, including data on common vacation stressors and research on the benefits of taking time off.

Many different stressors can arise on vacation

As mentioned, vacation can both relieve and cause stress. Through interviews and observations, one study of about 50 tourists found that people experience four main types of stress on vacation: stress related to service providers, travelers themselves, travel partners, and the environment. 

More than half of people might feel anxious about air travel

One common stressor is air travel, data shows. Out of 238 respondents in one study, about 40 percent experienced anxiety during takeoff and landing, over 50 percent felt anxious about flight delays, and 33 percent worried about customs and baggage claims. Overall, women experienced higher air travel anxiety than men, the study found. 

The mental health benefits of vacation can fade within a few days

Although the APA survey mentioned above found that most working adults return from vacation feeling more motivated, less stressed, and with a boost in positivity and energy, these effects are short-lived, according to researchers. The survey found that the positive mental health effects of a vacation fade quickly, in as little as a “few days” for 40 percent of respondents. Similarly, an earlier survey of 131 teachers found that while vacations led to increased work engagement and reduced burnout, these benefits diminished within a month.

Vacation can be linked with a lower risk of death over time

In addition to the mental health benefits of vacation, taking time off can be good for physical health (which in turn can benefit mental health). A study of over 12,000 middle-aged men at high risk for coronary heart disease found that more frequent vacations were linked to a lower overall risk of death and a reduced risk of death from cardiovascular causes. These findings held true even after adjusting for variables like income and nonfatal cardiovascular events during the nine-year study period.

Taking multiple annual vacations is linked with heart health for some 

Similarly, researchers tracking 749 women from Massachusetts over two decades discovered that those who took multiple annual vacations were less likely to develop heart problems. On the flip side, the study found that those who took vacations less than once every six years were nearly eight times more likely to develop heart problems than their twice-annual-vacationing counterparts. 

How to maximize your vacation to boost mental health

Below are some steps that can be taken to set yourself up for relaxation on vacation and maximize the mental health benefits of time off. Whether you’re planning a quick weekend getaway or a long, adventurous trip, these tips will help you return home feeling as well as possible. 

Plan mindfully

Since data shows that vacation planning can be a significant source of stress, especially for international trips or those involving family, approaching it mindfully can reduce anxiety. Break down the process into manageable steps, delegate tasks when possible and set realistic expectations to avoid overwhelm.

Prepare for common stressors

If there’s a part of travel that often causes stress, plan ahead. For example, knowing that air travel is a source of anxiety for many, allow extra time for delays and stay organized with your travel documents and baggage. You can also consider practicing relaxation techniques or using apps designed to help with travel anxiety throughout a vacation. 

Find other ways to take care of yourself 

While vacations can recharge you, their mental health benefits may be short-lived, fading within a few days for many people. To extend these benefits, try to incorporate elements of relaxation and mindfulness into your everyday life when you return and seek help for mental health conditions.

The post Data shows that vacations can cause stress appeared first on KVIA.

Adriana Heldiz for CalMatters // iStock

More schools are banning smartphones, but kids keep bringing them

Illustration with pink locker showing contents depicting concept of cell phone ban.

At Bullard High School in Fresno, California, it’s easy to see the benefits of banning students’ cellphones. Bullying is down and socialization is up, principal Armen Torigian said.

Enforcing the smartphone restrictions? That’s been harder.

Instead of putting their devices in magnetically locked pouches, like they’re supposed to, some kids will stick something else in there instead, like a disused old phone, a calculator, a glue bottle or just the phone case. Others attack the pouch, pulling at stitches, cutting the bottom, or defacing it so it looks closed when it’s really open. Most students comply, but those who don’t create disproportionate chaos.

“You should see how bad it is,” Torigian said. “It’s great to say no phones, but I don’t think people realize the addiction of the phones and what students will go to to tell you ‘No, you’re not taking my phone.'”

Bullard, which began restricting phones two years ago, is a step ahead of other schools around the state that have moved recently to prohibit cellphones in classrooms, CalMatters reports. Bullard and other pioneering schools offer a preview of how such bans might play out as they become more common. Educators who have enacted the smartphone restrictions said they help bolster student participation and reduce bullying but also raise challenges, like how to effectively keep phones locked up against determined students and how to identify and treat kids truly addicted to their devices. 

Citing Bullard as an example, Gov. Gavin Newsom on Aug. 13, urged school districts statewide to “act now” and adopt similar restrictions on smartphone use, reminding them that a 2019 law gives them the authority to do so. Los Angeles Unified, the nation’s second-largest school district, recently approved plans to ban phones in January. One bill before the state legislature would impose similar limits statewide while another would ban the use of social media at school. Another would prevent social media companies from sending notifications during school hours as part of a broader set of regulations intended to disrupt social media addiction. 

Calls to limit how students use smartphones are driven in part by concerned educators. A Pew Research Center survey released in June found that one in three middle school teachers and nearly three in four high school teachers call smartphones a major problem. During school hours in a single day, the average student receives 60 notifications and spends 43 minutes — roughly the length of a classroom period — on their phone, according to a 2023 study by Common Sense Media.

There is growing pressure to protect young people from excessive screen time generally:

• In June, U.S. Surgeon General Dr. Vivek Murthy urged Congress to require social media companies to place warning labels on their content in order to protect young people.
• Attorneys general from 45 U.S. states filed lawsuits against Meta for failing to protect children.
• Released in March, the popular book “The Anxious Generation” correlates declining mental health among young people with smartphone adoption and encourages parents to demand school districts ban smartphones until high school.

The moves to limit smartphone use in California put it near the forefront of an increasingly national trend. In New York, Gov. Kathy Hochul has reportedly been mulling a statewide school smartphone ban for several months.  Florida, Ohio and Indiana have all imposed some degree of statewide restrictions on phones in schools, and several other states have introduced similar legislation. Education Week in June said 11 states either restrict or encourage school districts to restrict student phone use.

In San Bernardino, ban leads to higher teacher satisfaction

Teachers have had classroom phone policies for years; what’s new at schools like Bullard are that their bans are blanket, campuswide restrictions. Many of the schools that moved early to adopt such bans are smaller and charter schools, like Soar Academy, a TK-8 charter school with 430 mostly low-income students in San Bernardino, California. Like Bullard, it also found enforcement of its ban was tough. Suspending students wasn’t an option. Neither was yanking phones from students’ hands. That left an honor system, which relied on students’ willingness to accept that smartphones and social media are harmful to their mental health and a distraction from learning.

“The key was that we needed 100% buy-in from teachers. There couldn’t be a weak link,” said Soar principal Trisha Lancaster. “It was scary, because we weren’t sure it was going to work. But we were determined to try.”

Lancaster said it also helped not to give parents or students a choice in the matter. The school simply presented the new policy, alongside ample research on the harmful effects of cellphones and social media on young people, and made it clear what the punishments would be.

For the first violation, staff would keep a student’s phone for the day and call their parents. Punishments would escalate until the sixth offense, when a student would have to meet with the school board, whose members might suggest the student enroll elsewhere.

At Soar, the idea originated at the end of the 2022-2023 school year, when teachers said they were fed up with distracted students and an overall dispiriting school climate. Students, Lancaster said, “had lost their social skills.”

So the staff decided to ban phones during class, at recess, at lunch and after school — essentially, all times except when in a special area where parents or others can pick them up from school. Students must keep phones off and in backpacks when they are not permitted. 

The first year of the ban went smoother than expected, Lancaster said. Some students and parents protested, but most understood the policy was in students’ best interests. Test scores didn’t budge much, but at the end of the school year, a survey of teachers showed much higher job satisfaction than they recorded previously. And walking across campus, the improvements are obvious, Lancaster said.

“Everyone on campus is so much happier. You see kids actually socializing, problem-solving, enjoying themselves,” Lancaster said, choking up as she described the school atmosphere. “It’s true, it’s one more thing to enforce. But education matters, and now kids are learning. That’s the No. 1 reason we did this.”

Photo by Adriana Heldiz for CalMatters

Bans from San Mateo to San Diego

Photo showing a sign that reads “no phone zone” in teacher Jen Roberts’ class at Point Loma High School in San Diego.

Soar’s experience has been mirrored on a larger scale in the San Mateo-Foster City School District, which serves 10,000 students at 21 TK-8 schools south of San Francisco. After a full-time return to campus in 2022, teachers in the district found many students were “interacting intensely with cellphones in a way we didn’t see before the pandemic,” said superintendent Diego Ochoa, and so the school district adopted a smartphone ban for four middle schools in 2022. 

Administrators were convinced to do so following a trip to a nearby high school with a smartphone ban. There, they saw students speaking to each other and looking at one another during break time instead of their phones.

Ochoa said the benefits of locking smartphones away is evident from improved test scores and an anonymous annual student survey that found a decline in depression, bullying and fights in the 2023-2024 school year relative to prior years. But saying the smartphone ban led to those benefits is tricky because they could have also been caused by other policy changes that happened at the same time, including a “restorative” approach to discipline that relied less on detention and suspension and more on support from counselors. Still, when students were surveyed specifically about the policy and the biggest difference in their education since it was put into place, they said that they pay more attention in class.

Ron Dyste also implemented a smartphone ban and, like Ochoa, recommends them. Dyste is principal at Urban Discovery Academy, a TK-12 charter school in San Diego, which banned cellphones during the 2023-2024 academic year amid an uptick in bullying, harassment and anxiety among students, staff told CalMatters. Nearly 90% of discipline cases, across Urban Discovery Academy and a school where he worked previously, could be traced to misuse of phones or social media, including students filming fights, spreading nude photos of classmates and encouraging students to kill themselves.

“I may never get some of those images out of my head. It’s horrible, what kids can do to each other,” Dyste said. “The damage to our kids and our communities is real.”

Dyste got the idea to ban phones when he and his wife went to a Dave Chapelle performance where audience members were required to secure their phones in locked pouches. “My wife said, why don’t we do this in schools?” he said. “We knew we had to do something.”

Over last summer, the school sent out notices to families about the new policy, explaining the rationale. Some students complained, but parents were thrilled, Dyste said. And the improvements in campus climate were almost immediate.

Instead of “hiding away with their screens,” said Jenni Owen, the school’s chief operations officer, students spent their breaks talking, dancing, playing volleyball and having fun. They developed empathy and a sense of community, she said.

At the end of the academic year, the school logged zero fights. The previous year, the school’s suspension rate was 13.5%, almost four times the state average.

“For schools that are wondering if they should take this on, I think the answer is, we have to,” Dyste said. “If we don’t educate kids on how and when to use this technology, we’re going to continue seeing a rise in suicide, sexual harassment and anxiety.”

State legislators have recognized the importance of healthier technology use among children. California students are supposed to learn about “appropriate, responsible and healthy behavior… related to current technology” under a media literacy law passed in October. 

To pouch or not to pouch

To enforce smartphone bans, some schools rely on smartphone lockers or locked pouches like the kind Dyste saw in use at the Dave Chappelle show. 

He tried using locked pouches from the Los Angeles-based company Yondr, but encountered numerous issues. Some kids were breaking and smashing the pouches to open them, or they’d listen to music all day by connecting their earbuds to their locked-away phones using Bluetooth.

“We had to return what was left of the equipment,” he said. Instead of going with Yondr, which wanted $6,000 to cover 110 kids, Dyste found clear, plastic phone lockers on Amazon that cost $50 each and put one in each classroom.

Yondr told CalMatters: “Our pouches are designed to withstand heavy-duty usage, and we are continuously working to improve the durability of our solution. However, there will always be students who try to push boundaries, especially when policies are initially rolled out. For this reason, it is critical that our team works directly with districts and administrators in rolling out the Yondr Program, to ensure that the most effective policies and procedures are implemented for successful schoolwide adoption. Without adherence to strong policies, schools may struggle with student compliance.”

Soar Academy also considered purchasing Yondr phone pouches, but was discouraged by the $19,000 price tag.

The San Mateo-Foster City School District paid $50,000 to obtain Yondr pouches for roughly 3,000 students. To use them, staff hand out pouches at school entryways each morning, then students swipe the pouch over a demagnetizer to unlock the pouch at the end of the day. Kids who want an exception to the rule — for a family emergency for example — must come to the school front office and ask for permission.

Yondr pouches come with a hefty price tag, Ochoa said, but he thinks it’s worth it to improve student focus.

“Call up five random superintendents, I don’t care where they’re at and ask them, ‘How much would you spend to have your students pay more attention?’ It’s worth millions,” he said.

Mixed feelings among students

Whether phones get locked in a clear box or a silver pouch, Oakland High School senior Leah West said she finds it punitive to require students to lock their phones away before they have broken any rules with the devices. While California’s Oakland High School does not have a blanket smartphone ban, West’s former English teacher sometimes locked student phones in Yondr pouches. 

“We should be given a chance to prove ourselves,” she said, adding that such an approach can motivate a rebellious streak in students like her who like freedom and don’t like when she isn’t trusted to make a responsible decision.

Louisa Perry-Picciotto, who graduated from high school in Alameda, California, in June, said students with jobs rely on their phones for work updates and all teens use their phones to communicate with their friends. Still, she’s grateful her parents didn’t get her a smartphone until she was in eighth grade. “I get distracted easily, and without a phone I was a lot more connected to the world,” she said.

Edamevoh Ajayi, who is a junior at Oakland Technical High School, said there’s no question some students don’t pay attention in class because they’re busy texting or playing games. Those students would definitely benefit from rules surrounding cellphone use like the kind being implemented at her school this year. But she feels like she has a strong sense of self-control and a desire to learn, and doesn’t need a phone ban. 

“When they take away my belongings, I feel like I’m being treated like a child,” she said. At her school, policies vary by classroom. In general, students are free to use their phones between classes and at lunch.

When students use their phones in class it can be frustrating for everyone else, said Fremont High School science teacher Chris Jackson. It puts teachers in a tough position: Either ignore that student and carry on for the sake of the students who are listening or disrupt learning for all students and confront them. 

In the long run, Jackson said he’s worried that students of color, who have historically faced higher rates of punishment than other students, will again bear the brunt of disciplinary actions related to smartphone bans. Rather than punishment, Jackson would prefer to see solutions that address root issues, like addiction, that lead students to use their devices in violation of the rules. So no matter what policy school districts adopt, he wants the focus to remain on teaching students digital literacy and how social media can be a risk to their health.

Course corrections

Some schools who helped pioneer smartphone bans have reassessed their initial approach.

This year, Bullard is changing its policy to allow students to access their smartphones at lunch time. Torigian said school administrators wanted to make room for important communications, for example by allowing students who pick up younger siblings to text with their parents. They also hoped the looser rules would encourage more students to comply with the ban.

If kids don’t comply, teachers call parents, and if they still refuse, they’re sent to what the school calls the re-engagement center. Starting last month, California began prohibiting suspensions for “willful defiance.” Torigian believes that schools need an exemption from the policy in order to enforce smartphone restrictions. He wants it back because he said he needs a way to hold kids accountable.

“That’s why the governor’s got to give us some leeway on this willful defiance; you can’t do one [smartphone restrictions] without the other.”

Ochoa said if he had to do it over again in San Mateo-Foster City he would devote more time to explaining to students why they adopted such a policy before putting it into place. Getting a smartphone is a big deal for middle school students, a milestone for adolescents that represents more freedom and autonomy, and it’s counterproductive for the school environment if they feel punished or something they value is taken away with little explanation.

“Our teenagers told us, ‘You forgot to explain why we’re doing this,'” he said, adding that even if a small percentage of kids violate the policy it can be really harmful academically and to school culture. “Even with your conviction to implement a policy like this, spend the time developing the language around the policy and explaining it to your students.”

Common Sense Media CEO Jim Steyer, whose nonprofit is focused on how children use media and technology, agreed that it works best to explain to kids why a rule to limit smartphone access at school is necessary. Parents and teachers need the same explanation so that they can help enforce some restrictions in order to keep kids safe and healthy.

“Any even remotely engaged parent is going to want their kid to do well in school, and is going to want them to understand why phones and social media platforms get in the way of learning and can be really distracting and can affect your mental health,” he said.

The post More schools are banning smartphones, but kids keep bringing them appeared first on KVIA.

Photo Illustration by Stacker // Getty Images // Canva

North America’s favorite sports franchises

A collage of the most prominent players across different sports teams such as Braves, GSW, Cowboys and Leafs.

The national leagues of football, basketball, hockey and baseball, known as the “Big Four” are currently all billion-dollar industries. As a result, it is fair to say that North America has cemented itself as a sporting giant.  

Betting sites now offer so many opportunities to get involved in the world of sports, but with over 100 sports franchises to choose from within the Big Four leagues, it can be tricky to know who to back.

But using a combination of search data, social followings, Youtube subscriber counts and fan attendance statistics, OLBG made a list of the most popular sports franchises across the United States and Canada. 

OLBG

The Most Popular Sports Franchises In North America

Table showing the ranking of the most popular sports franchises in North America.

Below is a list of the most sought-after sports franchises across the Big Four leagues. With a total of 124 franchises in America and Canada, they are ranked based on their social popularity and attendance.

1. Golden State Warriors, NBA – Popularity score of 6.37/10

Of all the Big Four leagues, it is a basketball team that tops the ranking for the most popular sports franchise in North America. Residing in California, the National Basketball Association’s Golden State Warriors have come out with a popularity score of 6.37 out of a possible 10, and they can thank their large following on YouTube as a substantial reason for their table topping exploits.

2. Dallas Cowboys, NFL – Popularity score of 6.02/10

In second place, it is a National Football League team that plays the role of runner-up behind the Golden State Warriors. Residing in Texas, the Dallas Cowboys have come out with a popularity score of 6.02 out of a possible 10, and based on their nickname of “America’s Team,” it is clear that they have a place in the heart of many.

3. Kansas City Chiefs, NFL – Popularity score of 4.53/10

With four Super Bowl wins to their name – including the last two editions of the NFL’s showpiece event, it seems that the recurring global coverage may have catapulted the Kansas City Chiefs into the limelight as they complete the top three in this list of the most popular sports franchises in North America.

OLBG

MLB’s Most Popular Franchises

Table showing the ranking of the most popular MLB franchises.

As the oldest major sports league in the world, Major League Baseball has cemented itself as a baseball giant. With teams spanning across 29 U.S. states, as well as in the Canadian city of Toronto, there are baseball opportunities all over North America, but which of these teams are currently the most popular?

1. Atlanta Braves – Popularity score of 2.45/10

With a score of 2.45/10, the Atlanta Braves top this list as the current most popular MLB team. Indicators of their popularity include the fact that they have 147,000 YouTube subscribers at the time of writing and collected a volume of nearly 35,000,000 searches in the past year. These two metrics have played a substantial role in the Braves coming out on top.

2. Texas Rangers – Popularity score of 2.31/10

Second in the list of MLB favorites, it is the Texas Rangers that take this silver medal in terms of the most popular baseball franchises. Playing their home games at Globe Life Field, they amassed an average home attendance of 31,272 and when added to internet search volume of 43,200,000, they are keeping the Braves hot on their heels.

3. Los Angeles Dodgers – Popularity score of 2.26/10

Completing this top three are the Los Angeles Dodgers who have a popularity score of 2.26/10. One aspect worth mentioning here is their 306,000 YouTube subscribers at the time of writing. Add this to an average social following of 3,466,667 over the three platforms and their popularity can be considered as something of a home run in MLB circles.

OLBG

NBA’s Most Popular Franchises

Table showing the ranking of the most popular NBA franchises.

Despite being a newer addition to the Big Four leagues, the National Basketball Association has certainly made its mark within the sporting industry. NBA players are currently among the top highest-paid athletes and this is the result of sponsorships and endorsements resulting from the widespread popularity of this sport.

1. Golden State Warriors – Popularity score of 6.37/10

Situated in California and featuring the iconic Golden Gate Bridge in their logo, Golden State Warriors come out as the most popular NBA franchise with a score of 6.37/10. This team is also home to Steph Curry, who is often regarded as one of the greatest basketball players of all time and highest point scorers. As a result, this franchise is often making the headlines due to his notoriety in the sport – evident by the 38,400,000 Google searches in the last year.

2. Los Angeles Lakers – Popularity score of 4.03/10

Joining the Golden State Warriors in this top three are the Los Angeles Lakers, which come in second place with a popularity score of 4.03/10. With a plethora of trophies in their cabinet, this franchise has had many moments in the spotlight. This success has inevitably led them to gain a large audience, evident by an average social media following of 19,566,667.

3. Miami Heat – Popularity score of 3.22/10

Any fans of basketball will be aware of the rivalry between the second-place franchise and Miami Heat, and it seems that in terms of popularity, Miami Heat has fallen just short on this occasion. Despite this, the prevalence of this team is still very impressive, with stats including 150,000 Youtube subscribers, and nearly 50,000,000 searches for this franchise in the last year.

OLBG

NFL’s Most Popular Franchises

Table showing the ranking of the most popular NFL franchises.

As demonstrated in the Most Popular Sports Franchises list, an overwhelming proportion of the teams were from the National Football League – with this sport being responsible for the top eight most popular franchises overall. From this it is clear to see that the NFL is hugely popular, but what makes these teams so sought after?

1. Dallas Cowboys – Popularity score of 6.02/10

After ranking first on the overall sports franchise list, it comes as no surprise that the Dallas Cowboys are the most popular NFL franchise. Outnumbering their opponents in every one of the popularity-related categories, this Texas team could not be more deserving of the title. Let’s forget the time the Cowboys blew a 24-point lead against the Detroit Lions.

2. New England Patriots – Popularity score of 4.53/10

Also making their second appearance in these rankings are the New England Patriots. As previously mentioned, they have a popularity score of 4.53/10 which is largely due to their large social media following – including 649,000 Youtube subscribers. Despite having a lower average fan attendance than some of the other NFL teams, they make up for it with their extensive social media coverage and livestreams. 

3. Philadelphia Eagles – Popularity score of 3.84/10

Completing our top three list of the most popular NFL franchises is the Philadelphia Eagles. Competing against their Pennsylvanian rivals, the Pittsburgh Steelers, it appears that the Eagles are largely preferred in terms of popularity. One notable Eagles fan is actor Sylvester Stallone who famously starred in the “Rocky” movie series. His support certainly helps the franchise serve up a knockout punch when it comes to popularity.

OLBG

NHL’s Most Popular Franchises

Table showing the ranking of the most popular NHL franchises.

Featuring a larger number of Canadian teams than any of the other Big Four leagues, the National Hockey League is considered the highest-ranked ice hockey competition in the world – but have the American teams pushed their way to the top of the popularity table?

1. Toronto Maple Leafs – Popularity score of 1.51/10

The Toronto Maple Leafs take the top spot as the most popular NHL franchise with a score of 1.51/10. This team currently has 143,000 YouTube subscribers to its name and last season saw an average attendance of 18,789. Not to forget, the 25 million plus social searches that it has collected in the past year.

2. Montreal Canadiens – Popularity score of 1.17/10

Just below the Maple Leafs, with a popularity score of 1.17/10, are the Montreal Canadiens. No slouches when it comes to social activity, they currently have an average following of 1.35 million across the three platforms and with an average attendance of 21,099, they find themselves on the coattails of the Maple Leafs.

3. Edmonton Oilers – Popularity score of 1.12/10

While it is a Canadian lockout for the top three places within the NHL rankings. Finding themselves third in the list are the Edmonton Oilers with a score of 1.12. This figure was cultivated after being hit by a low YouTube subscriber count of just 85,000. However, this was also offset against a search volume of 18,000,000 in the past year and this means it is the bronze medal for Edmonton’s finest.

OLBG

Every U.S. State’s Most Popular Franchise

Table ranking every US state’s most popular franchise.

As previously mentioned, the Big Four leagues include teams from a range of areas across North America, and some of these locations play host to multiple teams. Because of this, OLBG also determined each state’s most popular franchise.

This list only includes U.S. states, and any states for which there were no franchises were removed. 

Methodology

Information from Stadium Maps was used to make a list of every sports franchise across the following leagues: MLB, NBA, NFL and NHL.

A combination of ESPN data and Wikipedia was used to find the average attendance for home games in each of the last complete seasons of each league.

Semrush was used to add up the total number of Global searches for each sports franchise between June 2023-July 2024. 

YouTube was used to find the current number of subscribers for each sports franchise. 

The following platforms were used to find the number of followers for each sports franchise: Instagram, X and Facebook. The average social following for each franchise was calculated by adding together the total number of Instagram, X and Facebook followers for each franchise and dividing this number by 3.

Finally, the popularity-based factors (average attendance, search volume, YouTube subscribers and average social following) were used and normalized each factor out of 10 before taking an average of those scores to get the overall popularity score.

The post North America's favorite sports franchises appeared first on KVIA.

Vitpho // Shutterstock

Where are all these trucks headed? The top destinations for Texas freight.

In many parts of the country, you can’t drive on an interstate without spotting a semitruck. But have you ever wondered where they are hauling all that stuff?

Truck Parking Club used Bureau of Transportation Statistics data to identify the top 20 destinations of freight from Texas as part of a broader national analysis. The analysis only includes domestic freight.

Most of the time, semis are headed somewhere within the same state. In all but one, the highest share of freight was delivered to other destinations within its own borders. The only exception was Rhode Island, which is the smallest U.S. state by area, leaving few possible in-state destinations for freight.

The average haul length has been decreasing for years as e-commerce—Amazon in particular—has normalized speedy and frequent deliveries. These days, regional warehouses and distribution centers are more widespread so trucks don’t have to move goods as far to get them to local stores or individuals. The COVID-19 pandemic exacerbated this trend, causing severe supply-chain disruptions, panic buying, and driving up online purchasing.

Nationally, Texas and California are the most common domestic freight destinations. These two states are major economic centers of the U.S. as the most populous in the nation with the largest state gross domestic product. Texas and California each offer huge consumer markets, major production centers, and abundant trade with international markets, making them obvious destinations for freight from across the country.

Trucks are the most prevalent shipping method in the U.S. and most commonly transport goods including construction materials, gas and oil, food and agricultural products, and waste. Read on to see where semitrucks in Texas are headed.

Canva

#20. Mississippi

– Value of freight: $11.6 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.4%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#19. Michigan

– Value of freight: $11.7 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.4%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#18. Arizona

– Value of freight: $13.3 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.5%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#17. Utah

– Value of freight: $13.8 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.5%

Canva

#16. Arkansas

– Value of freight: $15.1 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

TommyBrison // Shutterstock

#15. Missouri

– Value of freight: $15.2 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

Canva

#14. Colorado

– Value of freight: $15.6 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#13. Indiana

– Value of freight: $15.7 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

ESB Professional // Shutterstock

#12. Pennsylvania

– Value of freight: $15.8 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

Jacob Boomsma // Shutterstock

#11. Kansas

– Value of freight: $16.3 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.6%

Kevin Ruck // Shutterstock

#10. Tennessee

– Value of freight: $18.0 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.7%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#9. New Mexico

– Value of freight: $20.3 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.8%

Canva

#8. Georgia

– Value of freight: $21.6 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 0.8%

Mia2you // Shutterstock

#7. Florida

– Value of freight: $25.3 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 1.0%

Canva

#6. Ohio

– Value of freight: $27.5 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 1.0%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#5. Illinois

– Value of freight: $30.4 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 1.2%

Marek Masik // Shutterstock

#4. California

– Value of freight: $50.0 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 1.9%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#3. Oklahoma

– Value of freight: $68.7 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 2.6%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#2. Louisiana

– Value of freight: $130.1 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 4.9%

Sean Pavone // Shutterstock

#1. Texas

– Value of freight: $1945.9 billion
– Share of domestic freight originating in Texas: 74.0%

This story features data reporting and writing by Paxtyn Merten and is part of a series utilizing data automation across 50 states and Washington D.C.

This story originally appeared on Truck Parking Club and was produced and
distributed in partnership with Stacker Studio.

The post Where are all these trucks headed? The top destinations for Texas freight. appeared first on KVIA.

MJTH // Shutterstock

Gen Z men are the biggest beauty market no one’s talking about

Young teenage man looking at himself in a bathroom mirror at home doing his hair.

There is no shortage of stories about young girls obsessing over skincare and stocking up on anti-aging serums. But Gen Z men may just be the most underrepresented demographic in the beauty business, particularly when it comes to hair care. 

Fully 84% of surveyed Gen Z men say they’d do almost anything to have better hair, compared to 78% of surveyed Gen Z women who feel the same, according to a 2024 study conducted by Hims. Gen Z men are also more in love with their locks than their older counterparts: 90% say their hair is one of their greatest assets compared to 83% of Millennial men and 63% of Gen X men.

Hair Awareness Across Generations

Hims

Gen Z Men are Body-Conscious

Image by Hims showing data about “Hair Awareness Grows Among Gen Z Men”.

Beyond hair, Gen Z men are also more body-conscious than their Gen Z female counterparts. On average, Gen Z men are spending twice as much on weight loss annually than Gen Z women ($714 vs. $360), and they are 1.5 times more likely than Gen Z women to follow a vegetarian or vegan diet (15% vs. 10%). Furthermore, 30% of Gen Z men say their weight is “extremely impactful” on how they feel about themselves vs. 25% of Gen Z women.

However, just because Gen Z men are body-conscious, it doesn’t mean they are insecure about their appearance. Nearly eight in ten Gen Z men, 79%, consider themselves to be “attractive” (a 4 or 5 on a 5-point scale) as compared to 67% of Gen Z women who feel the same. 

7 Ways Hair Matters For Gen Z Men

Gen Z men are two times more stressed about their hair than the upcoming presidential election.

When asked what stresses them out most, surveyed Gen Z men were twice as likely to say “My hair” (15%) than “The upcoming presidential election” (7.5%). They are also more stressed out about their hair than their ex (12%), climate change (12%), and even “the unknown” (12%). 

They spend more on hair care than Millennial men or Gen Z women.

Gen Z men shell out an average of $593 on hair care annually, 34% more than Gen Z women, who report spending $425 annually. What are they spending on? Some 39% take vitamins or supplements specifically to improve their hair (vs. 30% of total respondents); and 38% have tried a hair growth product (vs. 31% of total respondents).

Gen Z men say a great hair day is better than going viral.

When asked to create their perfect day, “A great hair day” was 50% more likely than “going viral” to make young men’s mornings (14% vs. 9%). It also ranked as a better way to start the day than having an inspiring idea (13.5%), dropping a few pounds (13%), an unexpected day off (10%), or good news in their news feeds (9%).

They spend (far) more time fussing with their hair than women.

Gen Z men spend 35% more time on their hair each day than do women overall. On average, Gen Z men report spending 44.26 minutes on their hair as compared to 32.68 minutes among women. One third of men say they spend 30 minutes to one hour a day on their hair, and an impressive 15% spend more than an hour a day taking care of and styling their locks. 

Gen Z men are more likely than women to choose great hair over good food. 

A significant 38% of Gen Z men say they would prefer to have good hair to good food, compared to 31% of Gen Z women and 28% of total respondents who feel the same. While it’s true Gen Z men do still opt for good food over good hair overall (62%), they were the demographic most likely to care more about what their hair looks like than what they eat. Only 30% of Millennial men and 21% of Gen X men prioritize good hair over good food.

Hair is powerful in forming their first impressions.

More so than any other generation or gender, Gen Z men say hair is what forms their first impressions of others. A robust 84% agree, “The first thing that I tend to notice about someone else is their hair.” This compares to 74% of Americans overall who feel the same. They are attracted to others with mid-length styles (37%) to long (35%) or short (29%) hair styles. They also prefer a clean shaven face (57%) to a full beard (43%).

Good hair days may even improve Gen Z men’s job performance.

Good locks lift young men’s moods. Fully 65% of Gen Z men say their hair is “extremely impactful” or “impactful” on their day overall, compared to 54% of Americans overall. Furthemore, 93% of Gen Z men vs. 85% of respondents overall say good hair is beneficial in their life in at least one way—21% say it improves their mental health; 18% say it inspires them to exercise more; and 16% say it improves their job performance.

Data & Methodology

This study is based on a 5,504-person online survey, which included 5,000 18-to-65-year-old respondents in the top 50 metropolitan areas (100 respondents per city) and a nationally representative sample of 504 18-to-65-year-old respondents to contextualize results. The study was fielded in May 2024.

Findings were analyzed by more than 100 demographic and psychographic cuts, including city, region, gender (when we refer to “women” and “men,” we include all people who self-identify as such), age, race and ethnicity, relationship status, parenting status, sexual orientation (heterosexual, bisexual, gay, lesbian, pansexual, asexual, queer, etc.), and political affiliation, among other areas of interest. 

All data in this study are from this source, unless otherwise noted. Independent research firm Culture Co-op conducted and analyzed research and findings.

3 Tips For Healthier Hair

1. Eat a balanced diet. Adopt a hair-friendly lifestyle. Your diet plays a crucial role in the health of your hair. Consuming foods rich in essential vitamins and minerals, such as omega-3 fatty acids found in fish, vitamins A and E from leafy greens and nuts, and biotin from eggs and avocados, can help improve hair strength and may even promote growth. Eating a healthy, balanced diet may even help prevent hair loss.
2. Incorporate regular scalp massages into your routine. Some research suggests that scalp massage may help stimulate hair growth. Scalp massages increase blood circulation to the hair follicles, which can promote regrowth and increase hair thickness. Use your fingers or a scalp massaging tool to gently massage your scalp for about five minutes each day. 
3. Opt for a silk or satin pillowcase. Unlike cotton, silk and satin create less friction, which can help reduce hair breakage and frizz while you sleep. Making this simple change can help improve the overall condition of your hair by minimizing wear and tear during the night.

The post Gen Z men are the biggest beauty market no one's talking about appeared first on KVIA.

Felix Mizioznikov // Shutterstock

‘Hurricane season from hell’ could drive up home insurance costs on vulnerable US coastline

Aerial image of homes destroyed in the Florida Keys after Hurricane Irma.

Weather experts have warned that the 2024 hurricane season could be especially destructive. The U.S. could see five to eight hurricane impacts, three to five of those major, according to the forecasting service WeatherBELL Analytics.

Homeowners in some hurricane-prone states already face the highest home insurance rates in the country. Astronomical costs from hurricane damage claims contribute to Florida’s average annual home insurance rate of nearly $11,000. Louisiana, the second-most expensive state, has an average annual rate of $6,354, according to Insurify data.

Resilient construction mitigates hurricane damage, but many homeowners are unprepared for a severe season. Less than 35% of Americans live in areas with modern, updated building codes, according to Rating the States 2024, an Insurance Institute for Business & Home Safety (IBHS) report.

Homeowners can’t control the weather, but they can take practical steps to reduce insurance costs and prevent wind damage to their homes.

Quick Facts

• The average annual home insurance rate in Atlantic and Gulf Coast states is $2,994 — 26% higher than the 2023 national average of $2,377.
• Five of the 10 most expensive states for home insurance — Florida, Louisiana, Texas, Mississippi, and Alabama — are susceptible to damages from a severe 2024 hurricane season, which could cause further rate increases.
• Florida residents, who inhabit the most hurricane-prone state in the country, paid an average of $10,996 annually for home insurance in 2023. They might end up paying $11,759 — 7% more — at the end of 2024, according to Insurify’s projections.
• Mortgage delinquency rates in Louisiana’s Houma metro area jumped from 1% to over 7% in the month after Hurricane Ida hit, according to CoreLogic.
• The 2022 hurricane season was the second costliest on record, with Hurricane Ian causing $65 billion in insured losses, according to reinsurance provider Swiss Re.
• Florida’s modern building code prevented an estimated $1 billion to $3 billion in damages to single-family homes alone in areas affected by Hurricane Ian, according to the IBHS.

Insurify

Louisiana, South Carolina, and Maine can expect double-digit insurance rate hikes

Bar graph showing home insurance rates in hurricane prone areas.

The U.S. could see a “hurricane season from hell” in 2024, according to WeatherBELL. The Atlantic basin will become an ideal environment for hurricane formation as El Niño, a period of warming ocean surface temperatures, reverses into La Niña, a period of cooling.

Accumulated cyclone energy (ACE), which measures wind energy and the overall activity of tropical cyclones, could reach two to three times the average on the Southeast coast of the United States. The odds of La Niña developing by June to August 2024 are 60%, according to the National Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration (NOAA).

“If there’s a surge in the number and intensity of hurricanes, insurance companies would face higher payouts for property damage, business interruption, and other related claims,” says Jacob Gee, an insurance agent and quality assurance specialist. “This would likely lead insurers to reassess their risk models and adjust insurance rates accordingly.”

Post-hurricane rate adjustments could mean steep hikes for homeowners affected by a hurricane, but they wouldn’t see premium increases immediately, says Gee.

First, insurance companies would collect data on the damages. Then, insurers would assess the data, factor it into risk models, and propose new rates to ensure they meet state regulatory standards. If regulators approve rate hikes, insurers notify policyholders in their renewal documents.

Several coastal states, including Louisiana, South Carolina, and Maine, could see double-digit home insurance rate hikes in 2024, according to projections by Insurify’s data science team. Louisiana’s home insurance costs may increase by as much as 23%.

Post-disaster insurance fraud also drives rate increases, especially in Florida, says Joseph Brenckle, director of public affairs with the National Insurance Crime Bureau (NICB).

“Unfortunately, disreputable contractors often swoop in after a catastrophic event, preying on desperation with high-pressure tactics and promises of quick fixes,” says Brenckle. “In 2023, U.S. insurers paid more than $92 billion in catastrophe losses, with upward of 10%, or $9.2 billion, lost to post-disaster fraud. This can add hundreds of dollars to a homeowner’s annual premium.”

Roof replacement schemes have contributed “enormously” to net underwriting losses for Florida insurers, according to Sean Kevelighan, CEO of the Insurance Information Institute.

Reinsurance rates jumped by 50% in response to natural catastrophes

Insurance companies have insurance too. Reinsurance provides coverage to insurers when they need to distribute some of the costs of damage from catastrophic events. Home insurers often turn to reinsurance after destructive hurricanes.

“The increased demand for reinsurance would likely lead to higher costs for insurance companies. Reinsurers would need to adjust their pricing models to account for the elevated risk and potential for more significant losses,” says Gee.

Catastrophe reinsurance rates increased by up to 50% upon renewal on Jan. 1, 2024, for policies hit by natural disasters, according to a Gallagher Re report. Reinsurance rate increases for insurers are often passed down to policyholders through higher home insurance premiums.

Building codes, quite literally, are make-or-break

When enforced, building codes save homeowners from weather-related damages totaling billions of dollars, the IBHS Rating the States 2024 report found. The report evaluates 18 states across the Atlantic and Gulf coasts and rates them on a 0–100-point scale based on building code adoption, implementation, and enforcement systems toward mitigating windstorm damage.

After Hurricane Ian, the IBHS analyzed 455 single-family homes and 57 multifamily structures built under the modern Florida Building Code (FBC). None of the FBC-built homes had structural damage. The FBC prevented an estimated $1 billion to $3 billion in damages to single-family homes.

Florida enacted the FBC in 2002, which means a higher proportion of homes and buildings are up to a strong modern standard compared to states like Louisiana, which updated its building codes in 2023. These states might not fare as well if hit by a storm that’s equivalent to Hurricane Ian, says Dr. Anne Cope, chief engineer for the IBHS.

“Building codes are a marathon game, not a sprint,” says Cope. “Enacting a building code today is not going to change the buildings that are on my street right now. But it will change the way they’re built in new neighborhoods. It will change the way that we re-roof them. … But it’s a long-term effort.”

Getting stakeholders on board for that long-term effort is challenging. Resilient construction that adheres to modern building codes costs about $2 more per square foot — a cost developers and homebuyers often find difficult to stomach.

“It does add to the initial purchase price of the structure, but it reduces the lifecycle cost,” says Cope. “So, by paying just a little bit more up front, you get a more durable structure, and the maintenance and ownership costs will [be lower] over time.”

Resilient building standards are still a “tough sell,” says Cope, despite National Institute of Building Sciences data showing that adopting the latest building codes saves $11 in damages per $1 invested.

Insurify

Poor building codes leave hurricane-prone states vulnerable

Table showing each state and their IBHS ratings, insurance rate, and projected changes.

“Most people presume that here in the United States — across all of the United States — we probably have building safety standards. But they would be wrong,” says Cope.

Many states, including Delaware, Alabama, and Texas, develop building codes on a local level, which means millions of homeowners live in areas with outdated regulations, if any. Unsurprisingly, Delaware, Alabama, and Texas have the lowest ratings in the IBHS report.

IBHS created FORTIFIED, a voluntary beyond-code construction and re-roofing method, in response to the lack of standardized building codes. The I-Codes, developed by the International Code Council (ICC), offer similar protection to homeowners.

“We have the information; we have the knowledge,” says Cope. “If people would simply use the model building codes that we have, we would be in a good spot.”

Louisiana, one of the most improved states according to the report, now uniformly enforces the ICC’s latest International Residential Code (IRC). The state saw five landfalling hurricanes between 2020 and 2021, the latest being Hurricane Ida. The resulting damages and strain on the private insurance market may have spurred Louisiana to update building codes.

Building code adoption is often reactionary, says Cope. “My home state of Florida was walloped by Hurricane Andrew in 1992. … Florida doubled down and said, ‘We will not allow this type of thing to happen to us again.’ It took 10 years because the good, modern Florida Building Code came out in 2002 … but Hurricane Andrew was a game-changer, watershed moment.”

Mobile County and Baldwin County in Alabama had a different watershed moment — Hurricane Katrina, which displaced 1.5 million residents across Alabama, Louisiana, and Mississippi. “Those two counties have adopted most of the provisions of FORTIFIED [building standards], even though Alabama doesn’t have a statewide code,” says Cope.

States don’t always move toward stronger building codes. North Carolina, which enforces the out-of-date 2015 IRC, put a moratorium on new building codes until 2031. Code updates include information about recently developed building materials and their performance against natural catastrophes.

Hurricanes drive mortgage delinquencies

Homeowners already feel strained, and an active 2024 hurricane season could displace those living on the financial edge. Costly wind damage is unaffordable to fix for some homeowners, especially without insurance, and standard homeowners insurance policies don’t cover flood damage.

Nearly three-quarters (74%) of homeowners Insurify surveyed don’t have flood insurance, and among that group, 13% thought their regular home insurance policies covered flood damages. 

Thirty percent of homeowners in a 2024 Insurify survey said they can’t afford their current mortgage interest rate now or in the future. Among that group, about 21% said they can afford it now but not for long, nearly 9% are tapping into savings until they refinance, and less than 1% say they can’t afford their home any longer.

Hurricanes often drive residents out of their homes permanently. Mortgage delinquency rates in Louisiana’s Houma metro area increased from 1% to over 7% in the month following Hurricane Ida, according to CoreLogic.

Yet homes constructed under modern building codes reduced the jump in mortgage delinquencies following major hurricanes by nearly 50%, a joint study by CoreLogic and IBHS found.

Weathering the storm

The more active hurricane season forecasted for 2024 reflects a larger pattern. Extreme weather events will continue to increase due to climate change, the NOAA predicts. Still, homeowners can take proactive steps to mitigate damage to their homes and lower their insurance premiums.

Gee recommends homeowners make resilient choices when it’s time to renovate or remodel. “Installing storm shutters, reinforcing roof attachments, and upgrading to impact-resistant windows and doors are a few ways to mitigate damage, and many insurance carriers provide discounts, as this reduces the chance of loss on the insured’s property.”

Cope echoed this sentiment, recommending homeowners look up their local building codes on Inspect to Protect and refer to the IBHS FORTIFIED standards if an up-to-date code isn’t in place. Local grants, like the Louisiana Fortifiy Homes program, could cover some of the cost by providing financial assistance for FORTIFIED Roof upgrades.

Improvements unrelated to storms can further lower insurance premiums, says Gee. “Examples include discounts for installing security systems, smoke detectors, fire alarms, and other safety features that can reduce the risk of property damage and insurance claims.” Bundling home and auto insurance or raising deductibles can reduce premiums even more.

Cope believes modern building codes can mitigate damage and reduce pressure on the insurance market as the U.S. experiences more frequent and severe weather events.

“Combining the sheer number of [weather] events with inflation on materials and supply chain difficulties, we’re seeing ripples in the insurance market that we haven’t seen before occurring in multiple states,” says Cope. “When these pressures hit us, the only thing that can alleviate that is more resilient construction.”

Methodology

Insurify data scientists determined average home insurance rates by combining real-time quotes from partner carriers and aggregated rate filings from Quadrant Information Services.

Rates represent the average annual cost of an HO-3 insurance policy for homeowners with good credit and no claims within the past five years. The policy covers a single-family frame house. Coverage limits are $300,000 dwelling, $300,000 liability, $25,000 personal property, $30,000 loss of use, and a $1,000 deductible.

Statewide costs reflect the average rate for homeowners across ZIP codes in the 10 largest cities. Insurify data scientists analyzed insurance company rate increases implemented throughout the second half of 2023 and into early 2024 to project end-of-2024 rates.

The post 'Hurricane season from hell' could drive up home insurance costs on vulnerable US coastline appeared first on KVIA.